100
IT EN DE FR ES NO PT NL FI EL HR ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ZF 25 M ZF 25 MA ZF 30 M 310.01.0006f MANUALE D’USO OPERATING MANUAL BETRIEBSANLEITUNG MANUEL DE SERVICE MANUAL DE USO BRUK OG VEDLIJEHOLD MANUAL DE OPERAÇÃO GEBRUIK EN ONDERHOUD KÄYTTÖ JA HUOLTO ΕΓXΕΙΡIΔΙΟ XEIPIΣΤΗ RADNI PRIRUČNIK

ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    124

  • Download
    9

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

ITENDEFRESNOPTNLFIELHR

ZF 4-1 MZF 5 MZF 10 MZF 12 MZF 15 MZF 15 MAZF 15 MIVZF 25 MZF 25 MAZF 30 M

310.01.0006f

MANUALE D’USOOPERATING MANUALBETRIEBSANLEITUNGMANUEL DE SERVICEMANUAL DE USOBRUK OG VEDLIJEHOLDMANUAL DE OPERAÇÃOGEBRUIK EN ONDERHOUDKÄYTTÖ JA HUOLTOΕΓXΕΙΡIΔΙΟ XEIPIΣΤΗRADNI PRIRUČNIK

Page 2: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

2

iA= 1,79ZF 10 M

3304 002 004

iB= 1,86

B

ZF 10 MG H I

Fig. 1

XXXXX

F

CRA

D

E

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

1

3

2

7

5

4

8

ZF 15 MIV

6

Page 3: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

3

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

Fig. 10 Fig. 12

Fig. 7 Fig. 9

N BA 2

1

Fig. 11

21

min.0.5

1

1

2

3

41

3

Fig. 6Fig. 5

5

43

2

1

6

XX

K

P

B

Fig. 4

Fig. 8

3

4

5

2

Page 4: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

4

IT Italiano 5

EN English 12

DE Deutsch 19

FR Français 26

ES Español 33

NO Norsk 40

PT Portoguês 47

NL Nederlands 54

FI Suomi 61

EL Elinika 68

HR Hrvatski 75

Page 5: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

5

Manuale d’uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

ITALIANOContenuto 1.1 Introduzione.................................5 2.1 Identificazione dell’invertitore .....5 3.1 Descrizione ..................................5 4.1 Installazione ................................5 5.1 Funzionamento ...........................6 6.1 Manutenzione ..............................7 7.1 Ricerca guasti .............................8 8.1 Dati tecnici ...................................9 9.1 Garanzia .................................... 1110.1 Fluido di trasmissione ATF ...... 8211.1 Lista punti di assistenza .......... 8312.1 Disegni di installazione ............ 8413.1 Warranty card ........................... 93

1.1 Introduzione

1.1.1 RESPONSABILITÀ DELCLIENTE

Il cliente/operatore è responsabile chei control l i per assicurare che lalubrificazione, il raffreddamento, lamanutenzione e tutto ciò raccomanda-to in questo manuale siano strettamen-te seguiti per fare in modo chel’invertitore funzioni regolarmente ed inpiena sicurezza.Ogni invertitore è coperto da garanzia,di conseguenza per la validità dellastessa, le istruzioni contenute in que-sto manuale sono da seguire scrupo-losamente.

ATTENZIONEIl produttore non è responsabile perqualsiasi danno o perdita causati daerrate installazioni, uso sbagliatodell’attrezzatura e insufficiente ma-nutenzione. Il Cliente si deve assi-curare che non siano presenti alcu-ne forze esterne come vibrazionitorsionali, causate da torsione e daflessione.L’interazione tra motore albero edl’elica può portare a vibrazionitorsionali producendo un martellan-te rumore degli ingranaggi con lapossibilità di danneggiare il motoree/o l’invertitore.Il Costruttore non è responsabile ditali vibrazioni torsionali inerenti al-l’installazione.

Questo manuale è costituito dai se-guenti tre capitoli principali:

1.1.2 DESCRIZIONEQuesta parte descrive brevemente lafunzione, l'utilizzo e le parti dell'inverti-tore ZF M.

1.1.3 UTILIZZOQuesta parte descrive le procedure diutilizzo e tutte le neccessarie misuredi sicurezza.

1.1.4 MANUTENZIONEQuesta parte contiene tutte le indica-zioni di manutenzione e di servizio chedevono essere svolte dall'operatore.Con i termini «sinistro, destro, babor-do e tribordo» usati in questo manua-le, ci si riferisce sempre ad invertitoriinstallati in direzione della marcia avan-ti.Importanti informazioni riguardantil'affidabilità tecnica e la sicurezza nel-l'utilizzo sono evidenziate nel seguentemodo:

PERICOLOTutte le procedure, le pratiche, le con-dizioni e le raccomandazioni, ecc., chenon vengono accuramente seguite,possono causare un danno o la mortedell'operatore.

ATTENZIONETutte le procedure, le pratiche, lecondizioni e le raccomandazioni,ecc. se non vengono accuratamen-te seguite, possono causare un dan-no o la distruzione dell'attrezzatu-ra.

NOTA: Si riferiscono ad aspetti tecni-ci per i quali l'utilizzatore dell'attrezza-tura deve prestare particolare attenzio-ne.

PERICOLO, ATTENZIONE e NOTAprecedono sempre il testo a cui si rife-riscono.

2.1 Identificazionedell'invertitore

La targa di identificazione è applicatasull'invertitore.La Fig. 1 riporta un esempio di targa diidentificazione:A Numero di serie dell'invertitore.B Codice della trasmissione.

C Rapporto di trasmissione per elicache ruota nella stessa direzione delmotore.

D Rapporto di trasmissione per elicache ruota in direzione opposta aquella del motore.

E Ogni anno è assegnata una diver-sa lettera progressiva.

F Tipo di invertitore.Significato delle designazioni degliinvertitori:G Tipo di invertitore.H Grandezza dell'invertitore.I Versione dell'invertitore.

3.1 DescrizioneGli invertitori marini ZF M sono delletrasmissioni ad ingranaggi elicoidalicomandate da un meccanismo auto-matico.Essi si distinguono per la loro robustez-za e affidabilità. Nondimeno si racco-manda che siano scrupolosamenteosservate le seguenti istruzioni per l’in-stallazione, l’uso e la manutenzione.Il non osservare le istruzioni contenu-te in questo manuale o ogni modificaall’invertitore non autorizzata, preclu-de la validità della garanzia.Su richiesta il costruttore può fornire ilmanuale di riparazione.

Fig. 2: 1) Scambiatore 2) Flangia di uscita 3) Targa di identificazione 4) Leva di azionamento. 5) Staffa telecomando. 6) Campana. 7) Albero d'ingresso 8) Asta livello olio

4.1 InstallazioneQuando si installa un invertitore ZF Mdevono essere scrupolosamente se-guite le seguenti indicazioni:• L'installazione deve essere eseguita

solo da personale specializzato.• POSIZIONE INCLINATA (Fig. 3):

La posizione della trasmissione, ri-spetto all’albero di entrata, non deveeccedere di un angolo di 20° (15° perZF MIV), in servizio continuo. Perquanto riguarda l’inclinazione latera-le permessa contattare il costruttore.

• GIUNTO ELASTICO: Tra motore einvertitore è necessario montare un

Page 6: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Manuale d’uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

6

giunto di accoppiamento elastico congioco radiale minimo (0.5 mm); trainvertitore ed asse elica, è raccoman-dato un accoppiamento con giuntoflessibile.

• ACCOPPIAMENTO MOTORE/TRA-SMISSIONE (Fig. 4):1) Flangia motore.2) Volano.3) Giunto elastico.4) Albero dell’invertitore.5) Flangia invertitore.6) Flangia volano.Valori massimi ammissibili radiali edassiali X: B-0,1 mm.

• ACCOPPIAMENTO TRASMISSIO-NE/ASSE D’ELICA (Fig. 5 - 6):

• Scegliere un adeguato scambiatoredi calore.

Per maggiori dettagli consultare il ma-nuale di installazione.Tipo di olio: ATF (Fluido Automaticoper Trasmissioni) vedi cap.10.1.

5.1 FunzionamentoTutte le trasmissioni subiscono un testdi collaudo prima della spedizione.In normali condizioni di funzionamen-to è consentita l’inversione di marciasolo quando il motore è al minimo deigiri. In casi di emergenza è comunqueconsentita l’inversione anche a più altigiri.La corretta funzionalità del circuitoidraulico è assicurata solo se vengonocambiati regolarmente il fluido idrauli-co, come previsto nella manutenzioneprogrammata. (Vedi capitolo 6.1).Controllare di tanto in tanto visivamen-te la presenza di eventuali perdite diolio.

PERICOLOIntervenire sull’invertitore soloquando sia il motore che l’elica sonofermi.

ATTENZIONEAl momento del primo avviamen-to la transmissione deve essereriempita con il previsto olio idrau-lico. Per le procedure di riempi-mento, tipo di fluido, quantità e li-vello, vedi capitolo 6.1.4.

ATTENZIONEL’uso dell’invertitore con una insuf-ficiente quantità di fluido danneggiagli ingranaggi.Una eccessiva quantità di olio puòcausare perdite alle guarnizione ditenuta e allo sfiato e può far aumen-tare considerevolmente la tempera-tura di funzionamento.

5.1.1 MESSA INFUNZIONAMENTO

ATTENZIONEPrima di mettere in funzionel’invertitore controllare il livello del-l’olio (vedi capitolo 6.1.1).

ATTENZIONEIn normali condizioni di funziona-mento le leva di inversione deveessere azionata con il motore al mi-nimo. Inversioni effettuate a più altonumero di giri possono portare unsovraccarico ai dischi della frizionee questo deve essere evitato duran-te il normale funzionamento.

NOTA: In caso di emergenza può es-sere effettuata l'inversione da marciaavanti a marcia indietro con motorefunzionante ad alta velocità.

POSIZIONI DI FUNZIONAMENTO(Fig. 7):A = Verso di rotazione dell’elica

opposto e quello del motore.N = Posizione di folleB = Verso di rotazione dell’elica ugua-

le a quello del motore.

PERICOLOAvviare il motore solo quando laleva di azionamento si trova in po-sizione di folle.

La temperatura normale d’eserciziodell’olio della trasmissione deve esse-re compresa tra 50°C (122°F) e 80°C(176°F).È permesso raggiungere solo per unbreve periodo di tempo la massimatemperatura di 100°C (212°F) ammes-sa per l’olio ATF.

ATTENZIONESe la temperatura è troppo alta, fer-mate immediatamente il motore,controllate il livello del fluidonell’invertitore e il corretto funzio-namento dello scambiatore di calo-re.Non ripartite se la causa delmalfunzionamento non è stata eli-minata.

5.1.2 NAVIGAZIONE A VELARIMORCHIO OANCORAGGIO

Quando il motore è spento e l’imbar-cazione naviga a vela, sia da rimorchia-ta o che si trovi ancorata, l’elica puòruotare per effetto della corrente.Questo non danneggia la trasmissio-ne. In una imbarcazione con due mo-tori, quando uno solo è in funzione, l’eli-ca di quello spento può ruotare libera-mente.Quando il motore è spento la posizio-ne della leva di comando è irrilevante.

ATTENZIONECon l’asse dell'elica in posizione li-bera la posizione della leva di co-mando deve essere in «N» (Fig. 7).Utilizzare la posizione di comandocontraria a quella di avanzamento sesi vuole bloccare l’asse dell’elica, incaso contrario si ha il danneggia-mento della trasmissione.

PERICOLONon eseguire alcun intervento nellatrasmissione durante il traino oquando l’imbarcazione è ancorata inun fiume in quanto l’elica puòruotare.

PERICOLONon eseguire alcun intervento nellatrasmissione di una installazionedoppia quando uno dei due motoriè acceso. L’elica di quello fermo puòruotare.

PERICOLOQuando il motore gira al minimo esi desidera che l’elica non giri (per

Page 7: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

7

Manuale d’uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

esempio se si deve caricare la bat-teria con la barca ferma), la leva dicomando deve trovarsi in posizio-ne neutrale N (Fig. 7).Evitare di fare girare l’invertitore idrau-lico in posizione neutrale ad alto nu-mero di giri per lunghi periodi.

5.1.3 SISTEMA DI COMANDO

ATTENZIONEControllare che il cavo di comandosi muova liberamente.

CORSA UTILE:Mod: ZF 5 M - 10 M- 12 M - 15 M - 15 MA

- 15 MIV - 25 M - 25 MA - 30 M.La corsa utile minima (N-A=N-B) dellaleva di comando, misurata sul foro diattacco esterno, deve essere di alme-no 35 mm; se misurata su quello inter-no di almeno 30 mm.

Fig. 8:1) Vite di fissaggio leva coppia di

serraggio 22 ± 1 Nm.2) Corsa minima per il cavo di coman-

do.3) Non smontare il coperchio di co-

mando.4) Tappo scarico olio.

Coppia di serraggio: Ma = 22 Nm(16 lb-ft).

CORSA UTILE:Mod: ZF 4-1 MLa corsa utile (N-A=N-B) della leva dicomando, misurata sul foro di attaccoesterno, deve essere di 38,5±1,5 mm,se misurata su quello interno di 33,5mm. Dalla posizione di folle, quandola leva ruotando compie un angolo di10°-12°, essa comincia a muoversianche in direzione perpendicolare ver-so l'esterno e si arresta a fine corsa(angolo di 40°).

Fig. 9:1) Vite di fissaggio leva coppia di

serraggio 22 ± 1 Nm.2) Non allentare il dado.3) Non smontare il coperchio di co-

mando.

POSIZIONE DELLA LEVA: In posizio-ne di folle deve trovarsi in posizioneperpendicolare al cavo di comando. Laleva può essere ruotata e fissata poi in

qualsiasi posizione tramite la vite diserraggio. La leva si deve trovare alladistanza minima dal coperchio di 0,5mm. Lo smontaggio, od anche il soloallentamento delle viti del coperchio,richiede un nuovo aggiustamento del-lo stesso (da effettuarsi solo da perso-nale autorizzato).

Fig. 10:1) Asta dell’olio e tappo di riempimen-

to dell’olio (17 mm)Coppia di serraggio: Ma = 20 Nm(15 lb-ft).

2) Distanza leva comando dal coper-chio min 0,5 mm.

CONTROLLI: Al fine di garantire ilbuon funzionamento è necessario con-trollare con regolarità la posizione del-la leva.

6.1 Manutenzione

6.1.1 CONTROLLO DELLIVELLO DELL’OLIO

PERICOLONon eseguire alcun intervento nellatrasmissione durante il traino oquando l’imbarcazione è ancorata inun fiume in quanto l’elica puòruotare.

DESCRIZIONE ASTA OLIO (Fig. 11):1) Superficie scatola.2) Asta livello olio.3) Livello olio.4) Olio ATF.5) Rondella di tenuta.

L’olio può essere controllato sia a fred-do che a caldo.

NOTA: Controllare sempre il livellodell’olio prima della messa in funzionedell’invertitore operando nel seguentemodo.- Allentare l’astina dell’olio (Fig. 11)

girandola a mano in senso antiorarioed estrarla.

- Pulire l’astina con uno straccio pulitoe senza polvere.

- Appoggiare l'astina senza avvitarla;rimuoverla e controllare che il livellodell’olio sia tra i segni di massimo eminimo (3-4 Fig. 11).

- Reinserire l ’astina e bloccarlaruotandola in senso orario.

ATTENZIONEAl momento dello spegnimento delmotore l’olio presente nel circuitoidraulico inizierà a fluire nella tra-smissione; tale quantità dipende daltipo di scambiatore e dal circuitoidraulico usati per il raffreddamen-to. Dopo un certo periodo l’olio sisarà raccolto nell’invertitore e que-sto ne alzerà livello.Non rimuovete l’eccesso di olio cosimisurato ma procedete come ai suc-cessivi punti.

- Lasciate girare al minimo il motorecon l’invertitore in posizione di follefino a che scambiatore di calore etubi del circuito idraulico si sianoriempiti di olio.

- Spegnete il motore e subito control-late il livello dell’olio; se necessariorabboccate. Il livello del fluido deveessere compreso tra i segni di maxe min presenti nell’astina (Fig. 11).Ripetere l’operazione dopo un breveperiodo di funzionamento.

6.1.2 CAMBIO DELL’OLIO

ATTENZIONEIl primo cambio dell’olio deve esse-re effettuato dopo 25 ore di funzio-namento.I successivi cambi di olio devonoessere effettuati almeno ogni 300ore di funzionamento ed in ognicaso non deve passare più di unanno tra un cambio e l’altro.

ATTENZIONEIl lubrificante esausto deve esseretrattato come un rifiuto speciale cheinquina l’ambiente: è quindi dasmaltire in funzione della sua strut-tura differenziata.

6.1.3 SVUOTAMENTODELL’OLIO

Rimuovere il tappo (1 Fig. 12) e faredefluire l’olio dall’apposito foro situatonella parte inferiore della scatola.

Page 8: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Manuale d’uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

8

6.1.4 RIEMPIMENTO CON OLIOATF

Riempire con olio per cambi automati-ci ATF rispettando le quantità di segui-to indicate. Aggiungere la quantità chesi ritiene necessaria per il riempimen-to dello scambiatore di calore e dei re-lativi tubi di raccordo.ZF 4-1 M: .............................0,30 litriZF 5 M: ................................0,30 litriZF 10 M: ..............................0,35 litriZF 12 M: ..............................0,55 litriZF 15 M: ..............................0,55 litriZF 15 MA: ............................0,50 litriZF 15 MIV: ...........................1,00 litriZF 25 M: ..............................0,75 litriZF 25 MA: ............................0,75 litriZF 30 M: .... min. 0,90 - max. 1,10 litri• Valido per inclinazione dell'albero in-

feriore a 20 gradi (15° per ZF MIV).

7.1 Ricerca guasti

Prima di tutto controllare se sono state completate le istruzioni indicate nei punti precedenti.

ANOMALIA POSSIBILE CAUSA RIMEDIO1. Alta temperatura dell'olio - Livello dell'olio troppo alto - rimuovere l'eccesso di olio

- Livello dell'olio basso - rabboccare

- Scambiatore di calore ostruito - sostituire lo scambiatore e controllare il

circuito dell'acqua

- Mancanza di acqua nel circuito - controllare il circuito e riparare la perdita.

2. Presenza di olio sulla scatola - Viti allentate - serrare alla coppia raccomandata

- Raccordi allentati - serrare o sostituire

- Asta dell'olio allentata - serrare o sostituire

- Livello dell'olio troppo alto durante - aspirare fino al segno di max.

il funzionamento

3. Innesto duro - Blocco distributore - consultare un centro di assistenza

- Telecomando - regolazione

4. Innesto lento - Blocco distributore - consultare un centro di assistenza

- Telecomando - regolazione

5. L'imbarcazione non si muove - Blocco distributore - consultare un centro di assistenza

- Posizione errata della leva di comando - regolazione

- Perdita dell'elica - reinstallare

- Rottura dell'asse elica - consultare un centro di assistenza

- Trasmissione mal funzionante - consultare un centro di assistenza

- Motore mal funzionante - consultare un centro di assistenza

Usare unicamente olio per cambi au-tomatici come da specifiche indicatenella «Lista degli oli raccomandati» apag. 82.

6.1.5 PROVA DIFUNZIONAMENTO

1) Effettuare una prova di funziona-mento dopo il cambio dell’olio.

2) Posizionare la leva di comando inposizione neutrale (N).Accendere il motore e lasciarlo gi-rare al minimo per un breve perio-do; in questo modo lo scambiatoredi calore ed il circuito idraulico siriempiranno dell’olio della trasmis-sione.

3) Fermare il motore e controllare dinuovo il livello dell’olio. Se neces-sario rabboccare. L’olio in eccessodeve essere rimosso.

Il livello nell’astina dell’olio deveessere compreso tra i segni di MINe MAX.Il livello dell’olio va ricontrollato dopoun breve periodo di funzionamen-to.

6.1.6 IMMAGAZZINAMENTOSe la trasmissione va immagazzinataper un lungo periodo di tempo, peresempio durante l’inverno, essa vacompletamente riempita di olio ATFattraverso l’astina di livello, in questomodo si previene il gruppo dalla corro-sione.

ATTENZIONECambiare l’olio quando la trasmis-sione viene rimessa di nuovo in fun-zionamento.

Page 9: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

9

Manuale d’uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

8.1 Dati tecnici

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 5 M 2.045 1.864 0.0066 0.0088 18 25 20 27 20 27 5000 8.5 19 SAE 6, B/W

2.722 2.150 0.0047 0.0063 13 18 14 19 17 23 5000 Max input power 20 kW

Technical Data for Pleasure Craft DutyBased on engine power B to DIN 6270; shock factorK = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MA 1.875 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13.5 30 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 39 53 47 63 50 67 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 2.136 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 M 1.556 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

1.875 1.955 Max input power 55 kW.Ratio 1.556 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 12 M 2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 37 49 39 53 47 63 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 31 42 33 45 40 54 5000 Max input power 55 kW

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 95 Nm (70 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 10 M 1.482 1.864 0.0109 0.0146 30 41 33 44 38 51 5000 10.3 23 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W

1.792 1.864 Max input power 38 kW.2.045 1.864 0.0095 0.0128 27 36 29 38 34 46 5000 Ratio 1.482 «B» Pos.2.722 2.150 0.0068 0.0091 19 26 20 27 25 33 5000 max torque 95 Nm. Ratio

1.792 «B» Pos. maxtorque 95 Nm.

Page 10: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Manuale d’uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

10

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

* Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».** Max 45 kW for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MIV 2.134 2.224 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 21 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.718 2.224 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.995 2.224 Ratio 2.134 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder - K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders - K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 230 Nm (170 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 M 1.880 2.095 0.0262 0.0351 79 105 80 107 80 107 5000 18.5 41 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.273 2.095 0.0216 0.0289 65 87 78 104 80 107 5000 Max input power 80 kW.2.737 2.722 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Ratio 1.880 «B» Pos.

max torque 230 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 185 Nm (137 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 30 M 2.148 2.636 0.0241 0.0323 72 97 87 116 92 123 5000 23 51 4 & 5 Yanmar JH

2.696 2.636 Max input power 95 kW.Ratio 2.148 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.Ratio 2.696 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 169 Nm (125 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 MA 2.227 2.737 0.0215 0.0288 64 86 77 104 80 107 5000 21.1 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.737 2.737 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Max input power 80 kW.8 degrees Ratio 2.227 «B» Pos.

max torque 169 Nm.

Page 11: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

11

Manuale d’uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

9.1 Garanzia

9.1.1 CONDIZIONI DI GARANZIALa ZF HURTH MARINE garantisce isuoi invertitori serie ZFM da qualsiasidifetto nei materiali e/o manodopera,per un utilizzo in condizioni normali enel caso sia effettuata una corretta ma-nutenzione.Questa garanzia è valida solo nel casoche l’installazione sia stata eseguitacorrettamente e che la trasmissione siastata utilizzata in modo corretto.L’obbligo della ZF HURTH MARINEsotto questa garanzia è limitato alla so-stituzione o alla riparazione, a sua scel-ta, della parte o delle parti riconosciutedifettose dalla ZF HURTH MARINEdopo suo esame delle stesse, a condi-zione che la parte o le parti siano ritor-nate al più vicino ZF HURTH MARINEdealer ufficiale, spese di trasporto pa-gate in anticipo, entro il termine di: Ven-tiquattro (24) mesi dalla data di instal-lazione o trentasei (36) mesi dalla datadi spedizione al costruttore di motori,è valida la condizione che scade perprima.Gli obblighi della ZF HURTH MARINEsotto questa garanzia, come qui spe-cificato, sono inoltre soggetti al rispet-to da parte del distributore o del co-struttore di motori che ha commercia-lizzato il prodotto, delle Procedure diGaranzia che sono parte integrante diquesta garanzia.Tutte le richieste di garanzia dovrannoessere presentate al distributore o co-struttore di motori che ha commercia-lizzato la trasmissione ZF.Questa garanzia non è valida nel casoche una o più parti siano state riparateo modificate senza il precedente con-senso scritto di un dealer ufficiale ZFHURTH MARINE. Questa garanzia nonè valida se il prodotto o i suoi compo-nenti o parti siano stati soggetti a catti-vo uso, negligenza, alterazione o inci-denti o non hanno funzionato secondole istruzioni scritte della ZF HURTHMARINE o hanno funzionato in condi-zioni più gravose o in ogni modo ecce-denti quelle specificate per il detto pro-dotto, o sono stati installati e fatti fun-zionare in maniera non corretta.Questa garanzia sostituisce tutte le al-tre garanzie esplicite o implicite checomprendono le garanzie di commer-

cializzazione e di buon uso ed even-tuali altri obblighi che comprendonodanni da utilizzo del prodotto.La ZF HURTH MARINE non è respon-sabile nè autorizza altre persone adassumersi altre responsabilità collega-te con la vendita dell’invertitore ZFM.La ZF HURTH MARINE non è in ognicaso responsabile per danni che su-perino il prezzo di commercio dell’in-vertitore ZFM.

Page 12: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Operating Manual ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

12

ENGLISHSection 1.1 Introduction ............................... 12 2.1 Gear Identification .................... 12 3.1 Description ............................... 12 4.1 Installation ................................ 12 5.1 Operation .................................. 13 6.1 Maintenance ............................. 14 7.1 Troubleshooting ....................... 15 8.1 Technical Data .......................... 16 9.1 Warranty ................................... 1810.1 List of recommended fluids ..... 8211.1 Dealer List ................................ 8312.1 Installation layout ..................... 8413.1 Warranty Card .......................... 93

1.1 Introduction

1.1.1 CUSTOMER’SRESPONSIBILITY

The Customer/Operator is responsibleto perform the necessary safety checksto ensure that lubrication, cooling,maintenance and recommended prac-tices are strictly followed for safe, en-joyable operation.All Transmission units are covered bya guarantee. Therefore: In respect tothe handling of the transmission unitsthe instructions stated in this manualare to be strictly followed.

CAUTIONThe manufacturer is not liable forany damages or losses caused byfaulty installation, wrong handling ofthe equipment and/or deficientmaintenance.The Customer has to make sure,that any external forces, as well asvibration caused by torsion andbending, are avoided.The interaction between engine,shaft and propeller may lead to tor-sional vibration, producing a ham-mering noise of gears and mightdamage the engine and/or transmis-sion.The Supplier is not liable for suchtorsional vibration inherent to theinstallation.

This manual includes, among others,the following three main chapters:

1.1.2 DESCRIPTIONThis part briefly describes function,operation and design of the ZF M.

1.1.3 OPERATIONThis part describes the procedures forOperation and all necessary safetymeasures.

1.1.4 MAINTENANCEThis part contains all maintenance andservice tasks to be performed by theoperator.Whenever the terms “right, left, star-board, port” are used in this manual,they always refer to the installed trans-mission in direction of forward move-ment.Important information related to tech-nical reliability and operational safetyare highlighted by the identifying wordsas follows:

WARNINGAny procedure, practice, condition,statement etc., which is not strictlyfollowed, could result in injury ordeath of personnel.

CAUTIONAny procedure, practice, condition,statement etc., which is not strictlyfollowed, could result in damage ordestruction of equipment.

NOTE: Applies to technical require-ment to which the user of the equip-ment must pay particular attention.

WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE al-ways precede the text to which theyapply.

2.1 Gear IdentificationThe identification plate is affixed to thereverser.An example of an identification plate isshown in Fig. 1:A Transmission Serial Number.B Transmission part number.

C Transmission ratio propeller rota-tion same as engine rotation.

D Transmission ratio propeller rota-tion opposite to a engine rotation.

E Every year a new progressive let-ter is assigned.

F Transmission Type.Significance of transmission designa-tions:G Transmission Type.H Size of transmissionI Version of transmission

3.1 DescriptionZF M boat reversing gearbox units areautomatically controlled helical geartransmissions.They are of sturdy construction andutmost reliability. Nevertheless the usershould make a point of observing thefollowing instructions for installation,operation and maintenance.Failure to do so, or unauthorizedchanges in the transmission, will pre-clude all and any warranty claims.A Service Manual is available from themanufacturer.

Fig. 2: 1) Exchanger 2) Output flange 3) Identification plate 4) Control lever 5) Remote control bracket 6) Bowl 7) Input shaft 8) Oil level dipstick

4.1 InstallationWhen mounting the ZF M transmis-sions, the following items should bespecially noted:• Mounting should be done by a spe-

cialist only.• Arrange the transmission and engine

correctly.• INCLINED POSITION (Fig. 3):

In relation to the input shaft, the posi-tion of the transmission must slant nomore than 20° (15° for ZF MIV) in thecontinuous service mode. Permissi-ble lateral inclination obtainable frommanufacturer on inquiry.

Page 13: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

13

Operating Manual ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

• COUPLINGS: Torsionally elastic cou-pling with min 0.5 mm (0.02") radialclearance, required on engine side;flexible elastic coupling recom-mended on propeller side.

• ENGINE-TRANSMISSION CON-NECTION (Fig. 4):1) Engine flange2) Flywheel3) Coupling4) Transmission shaft5) Transmission flange6) Flywheel housingMax radial and face runoutX: B- 0.1 mm

• TRANSMISSIBLE-PROPELLERSHAFT CONNECTION (Fig. 5 - 6):

• Choose adequate cooler.For detail information see Installationon Manual.Type of fluid: ATF (Automatic Trans-mission Fluid); see chapter 10.1.

5.1 Operationll transmissions have been submittedto a test run before shipment:During normal operation, the transmis-sion should only be shifted with theengine at idle speed.In emergency cases it is also admissi-ble to shift at higher speeds.The hydraulic circuit will only operatecorrectly if the hydraulic fluid is changedregularly, as indicated in the mainte-nance schedule. (See chapter 6.1).Visual checks for leakage should bemade from time to time.

WARNINGWork on the transmission must onlybe performed with the engine andpropeller at standstill.

CAUTIONBefore the first start-up, the trans-mission must be filled with trans-mission fluid. For filling procedure,fluid type, quantity and level referto chapter 6.1.4 fluid change.

CAUTIONUsing the transmission with an in-

sufficient oil level will damage thegears. An excessive oil level maycause leakage at the shaft seals andthe transmission breather, and raisethe operating temperature consid-erably.

5.1.1 OPERATION PROCEDURE

CAUTIONBefore operating the transmission,check fluid level (see chapter 6.1.1).

CAUTIONDuring normal operation, the trans-mission should only be shifted withthe engine at idle speed. Shifting athigher engine speed may lead tooverstress of the friction disks of thecoupling and should be avoided innormal operation.

NOTE: The transmission may beshifted from forward to reverse in caseof emergency, even at high enginespeed.

SHIFTING POSITIONS (figure 7):A = Propeller rotation opposite of

engine rotationN = Neutral positionB = Propeller rotation same as engine

rotation

WARNINGStart engine with transmission inneutral only.

Normal operating temperature of thetransmission oil should be in the rangeof 50°C (122°F) to 80°C (176°F).Max. permissible ATF temperature of100°C (212°F) may only be reached fora short time.

CAUTIONIf the fluid temperature is too high,stop engine immediately and checktransmission fluid level and oilcooler for proper water flow.Do not start the engine again untilthe malfunction is eliminated.

5.1.2 SAILING, TUGGEDOR ANCHORED

The propeller may turn owing to theeffect of the current when the engineis off and the craft is sailing, or when itis tugged or anchored. This representsno danger for the transmission. In aboat with two engines, the propeller ofthe unused transmission may idlefreely. When the engine is off, the po-sition of the shifting lever is irrelevant.

CAUTIONIdling position of the propeller: gearshift lever must be in «N» (Fig. 7)position. Use the shift position op-posite to the direction of travel forlocking the propeller shaft, other-wise the transmission will be dam-aged.

WARNINGDo not work on the transmissionwhen being towed, or anchoring ina river because the propeller mayrotate.

WARNINGDo not work on the transmission ina twin engine boat, when one unitis under power. The propeller shaftof the inoperative transmission willrotate.

WARNINGWhen the engine runs idle, but thepropeller shaft should not be driven(such as when charging the batterywith the generator), the shifting le-ver (figure 7) must be held in theneutral position (N) to prevent theboat from moving.Avoid to run the hydraulic gearboxin neutral at high engine speed fora long time.

5.1.3 CONTROL SYSTEM

CAUTIONMake certain that control rod or ca-ble is easily movable.

Page 14: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Operating Manual ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

14

LEVER TRAVEL:Mod: ZF 5 M - 10 M- 12 M - 15 M - 15 MA

- 15 MIV - 25 M - 25 MA - 30 M.Minimum travel of gear shift lever (N-A=N-B) must be 35 mm (1.3/8") forouter pivot point and 30 mm (1.3/16")for inner pivot point.

Fig. 8:1) Clamping screw torque

22 ± 1 Nm (17 lbf ft)2) Minimum lever travel for control cable3) Do not open cover4) Oil drain plug

Driving torque: Ma = 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).

LEVER TRAVEL:Mod: ZF 4-1 MTravel of gear shift lever (N-A=N-B)must be 38,5±1,5 mm (1.52 in ± 0.06in) for outer pivot point and 33,5±1,5mm, (1.32 in ± 0.06 in) for inner pivotpoint, from neutral position. When thelever pass over the angle of 10°-12°, itstarts to move outside perpendicularyand stops when the travel is completed(angle of 40°).

Fig. 9:1) Clamping screw torque

22 ± 1 Nm (17 lbf ft)2) Do not unscrew the nut3) Do not open cover

LEVER POSITION: In neutral positionperpendicular to control rod or cable.Gear shift lever can be fixed in anyposition by means of clamping screw.Minimum distance between gear shiftlever and cover 0.5 mm (0.02"). Open-ing or loosening of cover requires re-newed adjustment (by specialized per-sonnel only).

Fig. 10:1) Oil dipstick and filler screw, 17 mm

Driving torque: Ma = 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).2) Control lever clearance min 0.5 mm

INSPECTIONS: Frequently check theposition of the lever to make sure thateverything operates correctly.

6.1 Maintenance

6.1.1 FLUID LEVEL CHECK

WARNINGDo not work on the transmissionwhen being towed, or anchoring ina river because the propeller mayrotate.

DESCRIPTION OF THE DIPSTICK(Fig. 11):1) Housing surface2) Dipstick3) ATF level4) ATF5) Retention washer

Transmission f luid level may bechecked in cold or hot condition.

NOTE: Always check the oil level be-fore operating the reverser. Proceed asdescribed below.- Loosen fluid dipstick (figure 11) by

turning the grip counterclockwise.- Wipe dipstick with a clean and

dustfree cloth.- Insert dipstick do not screw in (3-4 fig-

ure 11). Remove dipstick and checkfluid level: Fluid level has to be betweenminimum and maximum marks.

- Insert the dipstick and lock it by turn-ing the grip clockwise.

CAUTIONAccording to the type and arrange-ment of the cooler and pipelines acertain amount of oil will collect af-ter stopping the engine and will flowback into the transmission after alonger rest period. This may causethe oil level in the transmission toexceed the max. mark. Do not re-move off the surplus oil but proceedaccording to steps.

- Let engine run at idle speed with shift-ing lever in neutral position until fluidcooler and all pipelines are filled withfluid.

- Switch off engine and check fluidlevel within a short time. If necessary,top fluid level off to the dipstick mark.The fluid level on the dipstick (figure

11) should be between the min. andmax. marks.The fluid level must bechecked again after a short drivingperiod.

6.1.2 FLUID CHANGE

CAUTIONThe first change must be performedafter 25 hours of operation. All sub-sequent fluid changes to be madeafter every 300 hours of operationor once in a year (according to theterm which is reached earlier).

CAUTIONUsed lubricant must be treated asspecial waste that pollutes the en-vironment: it must therefore de dis-posed of in accordance with its par-ticular structure.

6.1.3 DRAININGTRANSMISSION FLUID

Remove the plug (1 Fig. 12) and allowthe oil to drain through the hole in thelower part of the housing.

6.1.4 FILLING UP WITHTRANSMISSION FLUID

Fill with ATF oil for automatic gear-boxes according to the indicated quan-tities. Add the quantity considered nec-essary for filling the heat exchangerand relative connection pipes.ZF 4-1 M: ........ 0 US-qts (0,30 liters)ZF 5 M: ............ 0 US-qts (0,30 liters)ZF 10 M: .......... 0 US-qts (0,35 liters)ZF 12 M: .......... 0 US-qts (0,55 liters)ZF 15 M: .......... 0 US-qts (0,55 liters)ZF 15 MA: ........ 0 US-qts (0,50 liters)ZF 15 MIV: ....... 0 US-qts (1,00 liters)ZF 25 M: .......... 0 US-qts (0,75 liters)ZF 25 MA: ........ 0 US-qts (0,75 liters)ZF 30 M: .................min. 0,90 - max.

0 US-qts (1,10 liters)• Valid for shafts tilting less than 20

degrees (15° for ZF MIV).Only use oil for automatic gearboxes,as given in the specification in the «Listof recommended oils» on page 82.

Page 15: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

15

Operating Manual ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

7.1 Troubleshooting

First of all check, whether all items of operating instructions have been complied with.

SYMPTOM POSSIBLY CAUSED BY REMEDY1. High fluid temperature - Fluid level high - Pump out fluid to max.

during operation mark on dipstick- Fluid level low - Add fluid- Plugged or restricted - Replace cooler and flush

fluid cooler water system- No water in cooling - Check cooling system

system and repair2. Fluid on transmission housing - Loose screws - Tighten to specification

- Loose screw connections - Tighten, replace- Loose dipstick - Tighten, replace- Fluid level high - Pump out fluid to max.

during operation mark on dipstick3. Shifts hard - Selector control - Consult service station

- Unknown - Consult service station4. Slow engagement - Selector control - Consult service station

- Unknown - Consult service station5. No movement of the boat - Selector control - Consult service station

- Improper selector position - Adjust- Propeller missing - Replace- Propeller shaft broken - Consult service station- Transmission malfunction - Consult service station- Engine malfunction - Consult service station

6.1.5 TRIAL RUN1) Carry out a trial run after the oil

change.2) Set shifting lever to neutral position

(N). Start engine and let it run idlefor a short time to fill the cooler andpipelines with transmission oil.

3) Stop the engine and check oil levelagain.

If necessary, replenish with oil. Ex-cessive oil should be removed.The fluid level on the dipstick shouldbe between the min. and max.marks.The fluid level should be checkedagain after a short driving period.

6.1.6 STORAGEIf the transmission is stored for longertime, for example winter storage, itshould be topped off through the dip-stick hole with ATF to prevent the unitfrom corrosion.

CAUTIONChange the fluid when putting theunit into operation again.

Page 16: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Operating Manual ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

16

8.1 Technical Data

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 5 M 2.045 1.864 0.0066 0.0088 18 25 20 27 20 27 5000 8.5 19 SAE 6, B/W

2.722 2.150 0.0047 0.0063 13 18 14 19 17 23 5000 Max input power 20 kW

Technical Data for Pleasure Craft DutyBased on engine power B to DIN 6270; shock factorK = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MA 1.875 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13.5 30 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 39 53 47 63 50 67 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 2.136 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 M 1.556 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

1.875 1.955 Max input power 55 kW.Ratio 1.556 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 12 M 2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 37 49 39 53 47 63 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 31 42 33 45 40 54 5000 Max input power 55 kW

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 95 Nm (70 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 10 M 1.482 1.864 0.0109 0.0146 30 41 33 44 38 51 5000 10.3 23 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W

1.792 1.864 Max input power 38 kW.2.045 1.864 0.0095 0.0128 27 36 29 38 34 46 5000 Ratio 1.482 «B» Pos.2.722 2.150 0.0068 0.0091 19 26 20 27 25 33 5000 max torque 95 Nm. Ratio

1.792 «B» Pos. maxtorque 95 Nm.

Page 17: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

17

Operating Manual ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

* Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».** Max 45 kW for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MIV 2.134 2.224 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 21 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.718 2.224 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.995 2.224 Ratio 2.134 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder - K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders - K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 230 Nm (170 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 M 1.880 2.095 0.0262 0.0351 79 105 80 107 80 107 5000 18.5 41 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.273 2.095 0.0216 0.0289 65 87 78 104 80 107 5000 Max input power 80 kW.2.737 2.722 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Ratio 1.880 «B» Pos.

max torque 230 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 185 Nm (137 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 30 M 2.148 2.636 0.0241 0.0323 72 97 87 116 92 123 5000 23 51 4 & 5 Yanmar JH

2.696 2.636 Max input power 95 kW.Ratio 2.148 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.Ratio 2.696 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 169 Nm (125 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 MA 2.227 2.737 0.0215 0.0288 64 86 77 104 80 107 5000 21.1 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.737 2.737 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Max input power 80 kW.8 degrees Ratio 2.227 «B» Pos.

max torque 169 Nm.

Page 18: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Operating Manual ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

18

9.1 Warranty

9.1.1 STANDARD WARRANTYZF HURTH MARINE warrants its typeZFM Reversing Marine Transmissionto be free from defects in material andwork-manship under normal use andmaintenance, provided that this war-ranty shall apply if, and only if, theequipment has been properly installedand operated.The obligation of ZF HURTH MARINEunder this warranty shall be limited tothe replacement or repair, at its choice,of any part or parts found to be defec-tive by ZF HURTH MARINE upon itsexamination of same, provided that thepart or parts are returned to the near-est official ZF HURTH MARINE dis-tributor, freight prepaid, within the time:Twenty-four (24) months from date ofcommissioning or thirty-six (36) monthsfrom date of delivery to engine manu-facturer, whichever occurs first.The obligations of ZF HURTH MARINEunder this warranty as set forth hereinshall also be subject to compliance bythe distributor or engine manufacturerwho has purchased the product withthe Warranty Procedures which ismade a part of this warranty.All warranties shall run to distributorsand engine manufacturers who havepurchased the type ZF Reversing Ma-rine Transmission. This warranty shallnot apply to any part or parts whichhave been repaired or altered, withoutthe prior written consent of an officialZF HURTH MARINE dealer.This warranty shall not apply if the prod-uct or any of its components or partshave been subject to misuse, abuse,negligence, alteration, or accident, orhave not been operated in accordancewith printed instructions of ZF HURTHMARINE or has been operated underconditions more severe than, or other-wise exceeding, those set forth in thespecifications for said product, or hasbeen improperly installed or reinstalled,or improperly maintained and operated.This warranty is expressly in lieu of allother warranties expresses or impliedincluding the warranties ofmerchantability and fitness for use andof all other obligations including with-out limitation, consequential damages,and ZF HURTH MARINE neither as-

sumes nor authorizes any other per-son to assume for ZF HURTH MA-RINE, any other liability in connectionwith the sale of the ZFM REVERSINGMARINE TRANSMISSION.ZF HURTHMARINE shall in no eventbe liable for any breach of warranty inan amount exceeding the purchaseprice of the ZFM RE-VERSING MA-RINE TRANSMISSION.

Page 19: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

19

Betriebsanleitung ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

DEUTSCHKapitel 1.1 Vorwort ...................................... 19 2.1 Getriebe-Identifizierung ........... 19 3.1 Beschreibung ........................... 19 4.1 Installation ................................ 19 5.1 Bedienung ................................ 20 6.1 Wartung .................................... 21 7.1 Fehlersuche.............................. 22 8.1 Technische Daten .................... 23 9.1 Garantie .................................... 2510.1 Öle empfehlungsliste ............... 8211.1 Händlerliste .............................. 8312.1 Installationzeichnungen ........... 8413.1 Warranty Card .......................... 93

1.1 Vorwort

1.1.1 VERANTWORTUNGDES EIGENTÜMERS

Es liegt in der Verantwortung des Ei-gentümers und des Benutzers, die not-wendigen Sicherheitsüberprüfungendurchzuführen und sicherzustellen,daß alle Schmier- und Kühlmittel inausreichendem Maße vorhanden sindund die Wartung nach den vorge-schriebenen Richtlinien erfolgt.

ACHTUNGDer Hersteller haftet nicht für fehler-hafte Installation, nicht sachgemä-ße Behandlung und unzureichendeWartung.Der Betreiber sollte sicherstellen,daß externe Krafteinwirkung durchDreh- oder Biegeeffekte vermiedenwird, da dies Vibrationen erzeugt.Die Wechselwirkung zwischen Mo-tor, Welle und Propeller kann zuDrehschwingungen führen, diehammerschlagartige Geräuscheverursachen und unter Umständenzu Schäden an Motor und Getriebeführen.ZF-Hurth ist nicht haftbar für solche,der Installation anhaftenden Dreh-schwingungen.

Dieses Handbuch beinhaltet unter an-derem die folgenden drei Hauptkapitel:

1.1.2 BESCHREIBUNGDieser Teil beschreibt in kurzer Formdie Funktion und Handhabung sowiedie Konstruktion des ZF M.

1.1.3 BEDIENUNGDieser Teil beschreibt die Bedienungsowie die notwendigen Sicherheits-maßnahmen.

1.1.4 WARTUNGDieser Teil beinhaltet alle Reparatur-und Wartungsaufgaben, die derBetreiber durchzuführen hat.Die in diesem Handbuch benutztenBegriffe “Steuerbord, Backbord, links,rechts” beziehen sich immer auf dasinstall ierte Getriebe in Vorwärts-richtung.Wichtige Informationen in Bezug auftechnische Zuverlässigkeit und Be-triebssicherheit werden hervorgehobendurch die folgenden Begriffe:

WARNUNGEine Betriebs- oder Wartungsan-weisung, Verfahrensweise, Darstel-lung, Bedingung usw., die nichtstrikt beachtet wird, kann zu Verlet-zungen oder zum Tode von Men-schen führen.

ACHTUNGEine Betriebs- oder Wartungsan-weisung, Verfahrensweise, Darstel-lung, Bedingung usw., die nichtstrikt beachtet wird, kann zu Schä-den am Gerät oder zu seiner Zerstö-rung führen.

Anmerkung: Gilt für technische For-derungen, auf die der Betreiber ganzbesonders achten muß.

WARNUNG, ACHTUNG und ANMER-KUNG stehen immer dem Text voran,für den sie gelten.

2.1 Getriebe-Identifizierung

Das Typenschild ist auf dem Wende-getriebe angebracht.Die Abb. 1 gibt das Beispiel einesTypenschilds an:A Seriennummer des Getriebes.B Identnummer des Getriebes.C Übersetzungsverhältnis GleichlaufD Übersetzungsverhältnis Gegen-

lauf.E Jedes Jahr wird ein progressives

Schriftzeichen verwendet.

F Typ des Getriebes.Bedeutung der Getriebezeichnung:G Typ des Getriebes.H GrößeI Ausführung

3.1 BeschreibungDie Bootsswendegetriebe ZF M sindautomatisch schaltbare Stirnrad-getriebe.Sie sind robust und zuverlässig. Trotz-dem verlangen sie, daß der Einbaugemäß dieser Anleitung erfolgt und daßder Benutzer die Vorschriften für Be-dienung und Wartung einhält.Bei Nichtbeachtung besteht keinGarantieanspruch.Service-Handbuch vom Hersteller zubeziehen.

Bild. 2: 1) Austauscher 2) Ausgangsflansch 3) Kennzeichen 4) Betätigungshebel. 5) Fernbedienungsbügel. 6) Glocke. 7) Eingangswelle 8) Ölmessstab

4.1 InstallationBei der Installation der ZF M Getriebeim Boot sollten folgende Dinge beach-tet werden:• Die Montage sollte nur von einem

Spezialisten durchgeführt werden.• SCHRÄGLAGE: (Bild. 3):

Die Position des Getriebes darf imBezug zur Eingangswelle bei Dauer-betrieb keinen Winkel über 20° (15°bei ZF MIV) einnehmen. Zulässigeseitliche Schräglage nach Rückfragebeim Hersteller.

• KUPPLUNGEN: Motorseitig not-wendig-torsionselastisch mit radia-lem Freigang (min. 0,5 mm).Propellerseitig empfeh-lenswertbiegeelastisch.

• MOTOR-GETRIEBE-VERBIN-DUNG (Bild. 4):1) Motorflansch2) Schwungrad3) Kupplung4) Getriebewelle5) Getriebeflansch6) SchwungradgehäuseZulässiger Radial- und PlanschlagX: K- 0,1 mm

Page 20: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Betriebsanleitung ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

20

• GETRIEBE PROPELLERWELLEN-VERBINDUNG: (Bild. 5 - 6):

• Wählen Sie einen passenden Wär-meaustauscher.

Detailierte Angaben entnehmen Siebitte dem Installationshandbuch.Ölsorte: ATF (Automatic Transmissi-on Fluid) siehe kapitel 10.1.

5.1 BedienungBei allen HSW-Getrieben wird vor Aus-lieferung ein Prüflauf durchgeführt.Das Getriebe sollte im Normalbetriebnur bei Motor-Leerlaufdrehzahl ge-schaltet werden.In Notsituationen sind auch Schaltun-gen bei höhreren Drehzahlen zulässig.Der korrekte Betrieb des hydraulischenKreislaufs wird nur dann gewährleistet,wenn die hydraulische Flüssigkeit regel-mäßig erneuert wird, so wie es derWartungsplan vorsieht. (Siehe Kapitel 6.1).Sichtprüfungen auf undichte Stellensollten von Zeit zu Zeit durchgeführtwerden.

WARNUNGArbeiten am Getriebe und Propellerdürfen nur durchgeführt werden,wenn Getriebe und Propellerstillstehen.

ACHTUNGVor Inbetriebnahme des Getriebesmuß Getriebeöl eingefüllt werden.Die Vorgehensweise, Öltyp, Füll-menge usw. finden Sie in Kapitel 6.1.4.

ACHTUNGDas Betreiben des Getriebes mit zuniedrigem Ölstand führt zu Getriebe-schäden. Das Betreiben des Getrie-bes mit überhöhtem Ölstand kannUndichtigkeiten an den Dichtungenund der Entlüftungsöffnung verur-sachen und die Betriebstemperaturerheblich steigern. Wir empfehlen injedem Fall die Verwendung einesTemperaturfühlers.

5.1.1 BEDIENUNGSHINWEISE

ACHTUNGVor Inbetriebnahme Ölstand über-prüfen (siehe Kapitel 6.1.1).

ACHTUNGDas Getriebe sollte im Normal-betrieb nur bei Motor-Leerlauf-drehzahl geschaltet werden. Schal-ten bei höheren Drehzahlen kann zuÜberbeanspruchung der Kupplungführen und sollte daher im Normal-betrieb vermieden werden.

ANMERKUNG: In Notsiutationen kanndas Getriebe bis zu einer hohenMotordrehzal von Vor- auf Rücklaufgeschaltet werden.

SCHALTPOSITIONEN (Bild 7):A = GegenlaufN = Leerlauf (neutral)B = Gleichlauf

WARNUNGDen Motor nur in Schaltposition «N»(Leerlauf) starten.

Die normale Betriebstemperatur desGetriebeöls muss zwischen 50°C(122°F) und 80°C (176°F) liegen. Nurkurzfristig darf die höchstzulässigeTemperatur von 100°C (212°F) für dasÖl ATF erreicht werden.

ACHTUNGWenn die Öltemperatur zu hoch ist,Motor abstellen, den Getriebeöl-stand kontrollieren und den Ölküh-ler auf richtigen Wasserdurchlaufüberprüfen.

5.1.2 SEGELN, SCHLEPPODER VERANKERUNG

Wenn der Motor abgestellt ist und dasBoot segelt, geschleppt wird oder amAnker liegt, kann der Propeller sich inder Strömung drehen..Dies stellt keine Gefahr für das Getrie-be dar. Bei einem Boot mit zwei Moto-ren kann der freilaufende Propeller desnicht benutzten Getriebes keinenSchaden verursachen. Wenn der Mo-tor abgeschaltet ist, ist die Stellung desSchalthebels unwesentlich.

ACHTUNGBei leerdrehender Propellerwellemuß die Schaltstellung «N» (Bild.7)

sein. Zum Blockieren der Propeller-welle muß die der Fahrtrichtung ent-gegengesetzte Schaltstellung be-nützt werden, sonst entstehtGetriebeschaden.

WARNUNGArbeiten Sie nicht am Getriebe,wenn das Boot abgeschleppt wirdoder in einem Fluß ankert, da sichder Propeller drehen kann.

WARNUNGArbeiten Sie nicht am Getriebe ei-nes zwei Motorenbootes, bei demein Motor läuft, da sich der Propel-ler des abgeschalteten Getriebesdrehen kann.

WARNUNGWenn der Motor im Leerlauf läuftund die Propellerwelle aber nichtangetrieben werden soll (z.B. beimAufladen der Batterie durch denGenerator), muß der Schalthebel(Bild 7) in der neutralen Position (N)gehalten werden, da das Boot sichsonst bewegt.Bei hydraulischen Schiffsgetriebeist der Betrieb mit hohen Drehzah-len über einen längeren Zeitraum inder Neutralstellung nicht zulässig.

5.1.3 STEUERSYSTEM

ACHTUNGAuf Leichtgängigkeit Gestänge/Seil-zug ist zu achten.

SCHALTWEG:Mod: ZF 5 M - 10 M- 12 M - 15 M - 15 MA

- 15 MIV - 25 M - 25 MA - 30 M.Mindestschaltweg am Getriebe-schalthebel (N-A=N-B) =35 mm füräußeren und 30 mm für inneren An-lenkpunkt muß sicher erreicht werden.

Bild. 8:1) Klemmschraube Anzugsmoment

22 ± 1 Nm2) Mindestschaltweg für Bowdenzug3) Schaltdeckel nicht lösen4) Ölablaßschrauble

Anzugsmoment: Ma = 22 Nm (16lb-ft).

Page 21: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

21

Betriebsanleitung ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

SCHALTWEG:Mod: ZF 4-1 MSchaltweg (N-A=N-B) =38,5±1,5 mmfür äußeren und 33,5±1,5 mm für in-neren Anlenkpunkt muß sicher erreichtwerden.Wenn der Schalthebel durch die Dre-hung einen Winkel von 10°-12° er-reicht, fängt er an, auch in die recht-winklige Richtung sich nach außen zubewegen und er hält bein Endanschlag(winkel von 40°).

Bild. 9:1) Klemmschraube Anzugsmoment

22 ± 1 Nm2) Mutter nicht lösen3) Schaltdeckel nicht lösen

HEBELSTELLUNG in SchaltstellungNull rechtwinklig zu Seilzug/Gestänge.Schalthebel mit Klemmschraube belie-big einstellbar. Abstand Schalthebel/Schaltdeckel mindestens 0,5 mm. Lö-sen Schaltdeckel erfordert erneutesEinjustieren (nur durch Fachpersonal).

Bild. 10:1) Ölmeßstab und Öleinfüllschraube

SW 17Anzugsmoment: Ma = 20 Nm (15lb-ft).

2) Schalthebelabstand min 0,5 mm

KONTROLLEN: Um den guten Betriebzu gewährleisten, ist es erforderlich, dieHebelposition regelmäßig zu prüfen.

6.1 Wartung

6.1.1 ÖLSTAND ÜBERPRÜFEN

WARNUNGWartungsarbeiten am Getriebe nurbei Motorstillstand durchführen.Tragen Sie immer Handschuhe,wenn an einem heißen Getriebe ge-arbeitet wird.

BESCHREIBUNG ÖLMESSSTAB(Abb. 11):1) Gehäuseoberfläche.2) Meßstab.3) Ölspiegel.4) ATF-Öl5) Dichtungsscheibe.

Der Ölstand kann in kaltem oder hei-ßen Zustand überprüft werden.

HINWEIS: Bevor Sie das Wende-getriebe in Betrieb nehmen, immer denÖlstand prüfen. Dazu folgendermaßenvorgehen.- Den Griff des Ölmeßstabes (Bild 11)

entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn drehenund aus dem Gehäuse ziehen.

- Das Öl am Ölmeßstab mit einemsauberen und staubfreien Lappenabwischen.

- Den, Ölmeßstab in die Gehäuse-bohrung einstecken, nicht zuschrau-ben (3-4 Bild 11), wieder herauszie-hen und Ölstand ablesen. DieÖlmenge muß zwischen Min.- undMax.-Markierung am Ölmeßstabsein.

- Den Ölmeßstab einführen und imUhrzeigersinn festdrehen.

ACHTUNGJe nach Art und Anordnung vonKühler und Leitungen ergibt sichnach dem Abstellen des Motors einebestimmte Ölmenge, die bei länge-rer Stillstandszeit in das Getriebezurückfließt. Dabei entsteht im Ge-triebe ein Ölstand, der über derMax.-Markierung stehen kann. Dasüber der Max.-Markierung stehendeGetriebeöl nicht absaugen. DieArbeitsfolgen durchführen.

- Den Motor starten und kurze Zeit mitLeerlaufdrehzahl laufen lassen, da-mit sich Kühler und Leitungen mitGetriebeöl füllen können.

- Motor abstellen und erneut denÖlstand überprüfen. Falls notwendig,Öl nachfüllen. Der richtige Ölstand isterreicht, wenn das Öl am Ölmeßstab(Bild 11) zwischen der Min.- undMax.-Markierung sichtbar ist. DenÖlstand nach kurzer Anfahrzeitnochmals überprüfen.

6.1.2 ÖLWECHSEL

ACHTUNGDer erste Ölwechsel muß nach 25Betriebsstunden durchgeführt wer-den. Alle weiteren Ölwechsel nachjeweils 300 Betriebsstunden oder imAbstand von einem Jahr.

ATTENZIONEDer verbrauchte Schmierstoff ist alsSonderabfall zu behandeln, der fürdie Umwelt schädlich ist: Er ist da-her aufgrund seiner differenziertenStruktur zu behandeln.

6.1.3 GETRIEBEÖL ABSAUGENDen Stopfen (1 Abb. 12) entfernen unddas Öl aus dem Stopfen im unteren Teildes Gehäuses ablaufen lassen.

6.1.4 GETRIEBEÖL EINFÜLLENDie Automatikbetriebe ATF mit Öl fül-len und dabei die untenstehend ange-gebene Menge benutzen. Die Mengehinzufügen, die man als erforderlichbetrachtet, um den Wärmeaustau-scher und die entsprechenden An-schlussleitungen zu füllenZF 4-1 M: .......................... 0,30 LiterZF 5 M: ............................. 0,30 LiterZF 10 M: ........................... 0,35 LiterZF 12 M: ........................... 0,55 LiterZF 15 M: ........................... 0,55 LiterZF 15 MA: ......................... 0,50 LiterZF 15 MIV: ........................ 1,00 LiterZF 25 M: ........................... 0,75 LiterZF 25 MA: ......................... 0,75 LiterZF 30 M: mind. 0,90 - max. 1,10 Liter• Gilt für Neigungen der unteren Wel-

le bis zu 20 Grad (15° für ZF MIV).Ausschließlich Öl für Automatikgetrie-be benutzen, so wie es in der «Listeder empfohlenen Ölsorten» auf Seite82 steht.

6.1.5 PROBELAUF1) Nach dem Ölwechsel ist ein Probe-

lauf durchzuführen.2) Den Schalthebel auf Neutral-Posi-

tion (N) stellen. Den Motor startenund kurze Zeit in Leerlaufdrehzahllaufen lassen, damit sich Kühler undLeitungen mit Getriebeöl füllen kön-nen.

3) Motor abstellen und erneut denÖlstand überprüfen. Falls notwen-dig, Öl nachfüllen. Zuviel eingefüll-tes Öl ist abzusaugen.Der richtige Ölstand ist erreicht,wenn das Öl am Ölmeßstab zwi-schen der Min.- und Max.-Markie-rung sichtbar ist. Den Ölstand nachkurzer Anfahrzeit nochmals über-prüfen.

Page 22: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Betriebsanleitung ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

22

7.1 Fehlersuche

Überprüfen Sie zuerst ob alle Vorschriften der Bedienungsanleitung beachtet wurden.

STÖRUNG MÖGLICHE URSACHE ABHILFE1. Hohe Öltemperatur - Ölstand während des - Öl absaugen bis zur Maximal-

- Betriebs zu hoch anzeige des Ölmeßstabes

- Ölstand zu niedrig - Öl nachfüllen

- Verstopfter Kühler oder - Kühler austauschen und für

- Wasserdurchlauf sorgen

- Leitungen durchspülen - Kühlersystem überprüfen und ggf.

kein Kühlwasser im Kühlersystem reparieren

2. Öl auf dem Getriebegehäuse - Lose Schrauben - Festziehen gemäß Spezifikation

- Lose Verschraubungen - Festziehen, auswechseln

- Ölmeßstab sitzt nicht fest - Bis zum Anschlag einschrauben,

auswechseln

- Ölstand während des - Öl absaugen bis zur Maximal-

- Betriebs zu hoch anzeige des Ölmeßstabes

3. Schwergängige Schaltung - Schalteinrichtung - Servicewerkstatt konsultieren

- Gestänge - Einstellen/justieren

4. Langsames Einrasten der Gänge - Schalteinrichtung - Servicewerkstatt konsultieren

- Gestänge - Einstellen/justieren

5. Keine Bootsbewegung - Schalteinrichtung - Servicewerkstatt konsultieren

- Gang nicht richtig geschaltet - Korrekt schalten

- Propeller verloren - Neuen Propeller montieren

- Propeller gebrochen - Servicewerkstatt konsultieren

- Fehlfunktion des Getriebes - Servicewerkstatt konsultieren

- Fehlfunktion des Motors - Sercicewerkstatt konsultieren

6.1.6 LAGERUNGWenn das Getriebe für längere Zeitgelagert wird, zum Beispiel in der Win-terzeit, ist das Getriebe durch die Öff-nung des Ölmeßstabes bis zum Randmit dem vorgeschriebenen ATF-Getriebeöl zu füllen, um es vor Korro-sion zu schützen.

ACHTUNGBei Wiederinbetriebnahme ist einÖlwechsel durchzuführen.

Page 23: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

23

Betriebsanleitung ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

8.1 Technische daten

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 5 M 2.045 1.864 0.0066 0.0088 18 25 20 27 20 27 5000 8.5 19 SAE 6, B/W

2.722 2.150 0.0047 0.0063 13 18 14 19 17 23 5000 Max input power 20 kW

Technical Data for Pleasure Craft DutyBased on engine power B to DIN 6270; shock factorK = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MA 1.875 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13.5 30 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 39 53 47 63 50 67 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 2.136 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 M 1.556 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

1.875 1.955 Max input power 55 kW.Ratio 1.556 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 12 M 2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 37 49 39 53 47 63 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 31 42 33 45 40 54 5000 Max input power 55 kW

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 95 Nm (70 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 10 M 1.482 1.864 0.0109 0.0146 30 41 33 44 38 51 5000 10.3 23 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W

1.792 1.864 Max input power 38 kW.2.045 1.864 0.0095 0.0128 27 36 29 38 34 46 5000 Ratio 1.482 «B» Pos.2.722 2.150 0.0068 0.0091 19 26 20 27 25 33 5000 max torque 95 Nm. Ratio

1.792 «B» Pos. maxtorque 95 Nm.

Page 24: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Betriebsanleitung ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

24

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

* Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».** Max 45 kW for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MIV 2.134 2.224 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 21 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.718 2.224 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.995 2.224 Ratio 2.134 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder - K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders - K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 230 Nm (170 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 M 1.880 2.095 0.0262 0.0351 79 105 80 107 80 107 5000 18.5 41 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.273 2.095 0.0216 0.0289 65 87 78 104 80 107 5000 Max input power 80 kW.2.737 2.722 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Ratio 1.880 «B» Pos.

max torque 230 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 185 Nm (137 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 30 M 2.148 2.636 0.0241 0.0323 72 97 87 116 92 123 5000 23 51 4 & 5 Yanmar JH

2.696 2.636 Max input power 95 kW.Ratio 2.148 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.Ratio 2.696 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 169 Nm (125 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 MA 2.227 2.737 0.0215 0.0288 64 86 77 104 80 107 5000 21.1 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.737 2.737 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Max input power 80 kW.8 degrees Ratio 2.227 «B» Pos.

max torque 169 Nm.

Page 25: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

25

Betriebsanleitung ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

9.1 Garantie

9.1.1 GARANTIEBEDINGUNGENZF HURTH MARINE gewährleistet dasZFM Schiffswendegetriebe als frei vonMängeln in Bezug auf Material und Ver-arbeitung bei normalem Gebrauch undWartung, mit dem Vorbehalt, daß die-se Gewährleistung ausschließlich gilt,wenn die Anlage einwandfrei eingebautwurde und betrieben wird. Die Ver-pflichtung von ZF HURTH MARINE imRahmen dieser Gewährleistung istnach eigenem Ermessen auf den Aus-tausch oder die Instandsetzung sämt-licher Teile beschränkt, die von ZFHURTH MARINE bei deren Untersu-chung als mangelhaft festgestellt wur-den, sofern das bzw. die Teile an dennächsten autorisierten Händler von ZFHURTH MARINE, Fracht bezahlt, frist-gerecht zurück-gegeben wurden:Vierundzwanzig (24) Monate ab demAuftragsdatum bzw. sechsunddreißig(36) Monate ab dem Inbetriebsnahme-datum an den Motorenhersteller, wasjeweils zuerst eintritt.Die Verpflichtungen von ZF HURTHMARINE im Rahmen dieser Gewähr-leistung gelten mit dem Vorbehalt, daßder Händler bzw. Motorhersteller, derdas Produkt erworben hat, dieGewährleistungsmaßnahmen erfüllthat aufgeführt sind, der einen Bestand-teil des Vertrages bildet.Sämtlich Garantieansprüche sind denHändlern und Motorenherstellern vor-zulegen, die das Getriebe verkauft ha-ben. Diese Gewährleistung gilt nicht fürdiejenigen Teile, die ohne vorherigeschriftliche Zustimmung eines autori-sierten ZF HURTH MARINE Händlersinstandgesetzt oder abgeändert wur-den.Diese Gewährleistung gilt nicht, wenndas Produkt oder eines seiner Be-standteile oder Bauteile Gegenstandeines Mißbrauchs, Fahrlässigkeit, Än-derung oder Unfalls geworden ist bzw.nicht nach Maßgabe der gedrucktenAnweisungen von ZF HURTH MARI-NE betrieben wurde bzw. unter Bedin-gungen betrieben wurde, die als er-schwerender gelten oder in andererWeise diejenigen überschreiten, die inden Spezifikationen für dieses Produktfestgelegt wurden bzw. unsachgemäßeingebaut oder wieder eingebaut oder

unsachgemäß gewartet und betriebenwurden. Diese Gewährleistung trittausdrücklich an die Stelle sonstigerausdrücklicher oder implizierter Ge-währleistungen einschließlich derjeni-gen für marktgängige Qualität undTauglichkeit für die Benutzung sowiealler sonstigen Verpflichtungen, u.a.einschließlich indirekter Folgeschäden.Und ZF HURTH MARINE übernimmtkeine weiter Verpflichtung im Zusam-menhang mit dem Verkauf des Getrie-bes, noch beauftragt ZF HURTH MA-RINE eine andere Person damit, einesolche Verpflichtung zu übernehmen.ZF HURTH MARINE ist unter keinenUmständen haftbar für irgendwelcheGarantieverletzungen für einen Betrag,der über dem Einkaufspreis desSchiffswendegetriebes liegt.

Page 26: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Manuel de Service ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

26

FRANÇAISSection 1.1 Introduction ............................... 26 2.1 Identification de l’inverseur ...... 26 3.1 Description ............................... 26 4.1 Installation ................................ 26 5.1 Fonctionnement ....................... 27 6.1 Entretien ................................... 28 7.1 Recherche des pannes ............ 29 8.1 Caractéristiques techniques .... 30 9.1 Garantie .................................... 3210.1 Liste des huiles recommandées 8211.1 Liste de distributeurs ............... 8312.1 Dessins d’installation ............... 8413.1 Warranty Card .......................... 93

1.1 Introduction

1.1.1 RESPONSABILITÉ DEL’UTILISATEUR

Il incombe à l’utilisateur de procéderaux contrôles de sécurité nécessairespour s’assurer que toutes les condi-tions de lubrification, de refroidisse-ment, d’entretien et autres soient res-pectées, afin de garantir une exploita-tion sans problème.Toutes les transmissions sont couver-tes par une garantie. Par conséquent:Les instructions contenues dans le pré-sent manuel doivent être strictementobservées pour manipuler les trans-missions.

ATTENTIONLe fabricant ne saurait être tenupour responsable des détériora-tions dûes à une mauvaise installa-tion, une manipulation incorrecte etun entretien insuffisant.Le client doit s’assurer que des ef-forts excessifs tels que les vibra-tions causées par torsion et aligne-ment défectueux soient évitées.L’interaction entre le moteur, la li-gne d’arbre et l’hélice peut conduireà des vibrations de torsion provo-quant le martèlement des engrena-ges et risquant de détériorer le mo-teur et/ou la transmission.Le fournisseur ne saurait étre tenupour responsable des dites vibrationsde torsion inhérentes à l’installation.

Le présent manuel comprend entreautres les châpitres principaux sui-vants:

1.1.2 DESCRIPTIONCette brève partie décrit des fonctionsde l’exploitation et la conception desZF M.

1.1.3 FONCTIONEMENTCette partie décrit les procédures né-cessaires au fonctionnement, demême que toutes les mesures de sé-curité.

1.1.4 ENTRETIENCette partie contient toutes les opéra-tions d’entretien que l’utilisateur devraeffectuer.Les termes “droite, gauche, tribord,babord” utilisés dans le présent manuelse rapportent à la transmission instal-lée dans le sens de déplacement versl’avant.Les informations importantes du pointde vue technique et de la sécurité sontmises en relief comme suit:

DANGEROpération ou procédure de mainte-nance, pratique, condition, instruc-tion etc., dont la non observationpeut entraîner de graves blessuresou même des accidents mortelspour le personnel.

ATTENTIONOpération ou procédure de mainte-nance, pratique, condition, instruc-tion etc., dont la non-observationpeut détériorer ou détruire de l’équi-pement.

Remarque: S’applique aux obligationstechniques que l’utilisateur de l’équipe-ment devra strictement respecter

Les mots DANGER, ATTENTION etREMARQUE précèdent toujours letexte auxquels ils s’appliquent.

2.1 Identification del’inverseur

La plaque signalétique est apposée surl’inverseur. La Fig. 1 montre un exem-ple de plaque signalétique :A Numéro de série de la transmis-

sion.B Référence de la transmission.C Rapport de transmission sens de

rotation de l’hélice identique ausens de rotation du moteur.

D Rapport de réduction sens de ro-tation de l’hélice inverse à celui dumoteur.

E Chaque année nous utilisons unenouvelle lettre progressive.

F Type de transmission.Signification des désignations de latransmission:G Type de transmission.H Taille de la transmissionI Version de la transmission

3.1 DescriptionLes inverseurs marins ZF M sont destransmission à engrenages cylindri-ques, commandées par un mécanismeautomatique.Elle se distinguent par leur robustesseet leur grande fiabilité. Néanmoins, ilest fortement recommandé de faireleur installation dans le respect absoludes directive figurant dans ce petitmanuel et de suivre étroitement lesconsignes relatives à leur maniementet leur entretien. La non-observation deces régles ou toute modification opé-rée sur l’inverseur entraînera la dé-chéance de la garantie du constructeur.Sur demande, le constructeur vousfournira un manuel d’entretien.

Fig. 2: 1) Échangeur 2) Bride de sortie 3) Plaque signalétique d’identification 4) Levier de commande. 5) Support de la télécommande. 6) Cloche. 7) Arbre d’entrée 8) Jauge d’huile

4.1 InstallationLes points suivants doivent faire l’ob-jet d’une attention particulière lors dumontage des transmissions ZFM:• Le montage doit être confié unique-

ment à un spécialiste.• INCLINAISON (Fig. 3):

La position de la transmission, parrapport à l’arbre d’entrée, ne doit pasdépasser d’un angle de 20° (15° pourZF MIV), en service continu. Quant àl’inclinaison latérale admissible,prière de contacter le constructeur.

• ACCOUPLEMENTS: Du côté moteur-obligatoire: accouplement élastique

Page 27: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

27

Manuel de Service ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

à la torsion présentant un écart ra-dial minimum de 0,5 mm; du côtéhélice-recommandé: accouplementélastique à la flexion.

• RACCORDEMENT MOTEUR-BOÎTE (Fig. 4):1) Flasque du moteur2) Volant3) Accouplement4) Albero dell’invertitore5) Flasque de la boîte6) Boîtier du volantVoilures admissible en directions ra-diale et axiale X: P- 0,1 mm

• RACCORDEMENT BOÎTE-ARBRED’HÉLICE (Fig. 5 - 6):

• Choisir un refroidisseur adéquat.Pour de plus amples informations, sereporter au Manuel d’Installation.Type d’huile: ATF (Fluide de transmis-sion automatique) voir chap. 10.1.

5.1 FonctionnementToutes les transmissions ont fait l’ob-jet d’essai avant l’expédition.En utilisation normale, la transmissiondoit être enclenchée avec le moteurfonctionnant au ralenti.En cas d’urgence, il est aussi possibled’inverser à des régimes élevés.Vérifier visuellement les fuites d’huilede temps en temps.Pour le bon fonctionnement du circuithydraulique, il suffit de changer régu-lièrement le fluide hydraulique, confor-mément aux indications de l’entretienprogrammé. (Voir chapitre 6.1).Vérifier visuellement les fuites d’huilede temps en temps.

DANGERLe travail sur la transmission doitêtre pratiqué avec le moteur et latransmission à l’arrêt.

ATTENTIONAvant la première mise en route, latransmission doit être remplie avecdu fluide de transmission.Pour la procédure de remplissage,type de fluide, quantité et niveau, seréférer aux chapitres 6.1.4.

ATTENTIONUtiliser la transmission avec un ni-veau d’huile insuffisant pourrait en-

dommager les engrenages. Un ni-veau d’huile excessif peut causerdes fuites au niveau des baguesd’étanchéité et du reniflard, et aug-menter considérablement la tempé-rature en fonctionnement.

5.1.1 PROCÉDURED’EXPLOITATION

ATTENTIONVérifier le niveau d’huile avant d’uti-liser la transmission (voir chapitre6.1.1).

ATTENTIONEn utilisation normale, il est préfé-rable de manoeuvrer la transmis-sion, le moteur étant au régime deralenti. Manoeuvrer à des régimesmoteur plus élevés peut entrainerune contrainte excessive sur lesgarnitures de friction, il convientdonc de l’éviter en exploitation nor-male.

REMARQUE: En cas d’urgence, il estpossible de passer de marche avanten marche arrière, a un régime de vi-tesse elevé.

POSITIONS DU LEVIER (figure 7):A = Rotation de l’hélice dans le sens

opposé du moteur.N = Position neutre (Point Mort).B = Rotation de l’hélice dans le même

sens que le moteur.

DANGERDémarrer le moteur avec la trans-mission en position neutre.

La température normale de service del’huile de la transmission doit être com-prise entre 50°C (122°F) et 80°C(176°F). Il est permis d’atteindre la tem-pérature maximum admissible pourl’huile ATF de 100°C (212°F) que pourune brève période.

ATTENTIONSi la température du fluide est tropélevée, arrêter le moteur immédia-tement, vérifier la niveau d’huiledans la transmission, et le débit

d’eau dans le refroidisseur d’huile.Ne pas démarrer le moteur avantd’avoir supprimé le défaut.

5.1.2 NAVIGATION A VOILE,REMORQUE OUMOUILLAGE

Quand le moteur est arrêté, le bateaunavigue à la voile, aussi bien remor-qué que mouillé, l’hélice pouvant tour-ner par effet du courant.Ceci ne présente aucun danger pourla transmission.Dans un bateau à deux moteurs, l’hé-lice de la transmission non-utilisée peuttourner à vide librement.Quand le moteur ne fonctionne pas, laposition du levier de commande n’aaucune importance.

ATTENTION Avec l’arbre d’hélice en marche àvide, le levier de commande doit êtredans la position «N» (Fig.7). Utilisezla position de commande contraireà la direction de course pour blo-quer l’arbre de l’hélice, pour éviterun endommagement de la transmis-sion.

DANGERNe pas travailler sur une transmis-sion pendant que le bateau est re-morqué, ou ancré dans uns rivièrecar l’hélice peut tourner.

DANGERNe pas travailler sur une transmis-sion dans un bateau à deux mo-teurs, lorsque l’un des deux fonc-tionne. L’arbre d’hélice de la trans-mission inopérante peut tourner.

DANGERQuand le moteur tourne à vide, tan-dis que l’arbre d’hélice est arreté(par exemple quand les batteries sechargent avec l’alternateur), le levierde commande (figure 7) doit être enposition neutre (N), pour que le ba-teau ne se déplace pas.Éviter de faire tourner le moteur àhaut régime longtemps en ayant lebloc hydraulique en position neutre.

Page 28: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Manuel de Service ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

28

5.1.3 SYSTÈME DE COMMANDE

ATTENTIONLa course utile du levier doit s’ob-tenir sans difficulté.

COURSE UTILE:Mod: ZF 5 M - 10 M- 12 M - 15 M - 15 MA

- 15 MIV - 25 M - 25 MA - 30 M.La course utile minimale (N-A=N-B) dulevier de commande, soit 35 mm pourle point de raccordement extérieur, soit30 mm pour le point de raccordementintérieur.

Fig. 8:1) Vis de serrage moment de serrage

22 ± 1 Nm2) Course utile minima pour tirant à

cable3) Ne pas démonter le couvercle de

commande4) Bouchon de vidange d’hulie

Couple de serrage: Ma = 22 Nm (16lb-ft).

COURSE UTILE:Mod: ZF 4-1 MLa course utile(N-A=N-B) du levier decommande, soit 38,5±1,5 mm pour lepoint de raccordement exterieur, soit33,5 mm pour le point de raccordementintérieur.En partant da la position neutre, quandla levier du command pass par la posi-tion de 10°-12° elle commence a sedeplacer verse l'exterior in directionperpendiculare, pour s'arreter au butde la course (40° angle).

Fig. 9:1) Vis de serrage moment de serrage

22 ± 1 Nm2) Ne pas devisser l'ecrou3) Ne pas démonter le couvercle de

commande

ORIENTATION DU LEVIER DE COM-MANDE. En position neutre, le levierdoit être perpendiculaire aux tringles ouau câble. La facilité de mouvement dulevier peut être réglée à volonté, à l’aided’une vis de serrage. Respecter unedistance minimale de 0,5 mm entre lelevier et le couvercle de commande.Après démontage et remontage de cecouvercle, faire procéder à un nouveauréglage (à effectuer par des spécialis-tes seulement).

Fig. 10:1) Jauge et bouchon de remplissage

d’huile (17 mm)Couple de serrage:: Ma = 20 Nm(15 lb-ft).

2) Ecartement du lever 0,5 mm auminimum

CONTRÔLES : Afin de garantir le bonfonctionnement, il est nécessaire decontrôler régulièrement la position dulevier.

6.1 Entretien

6.1.1 CONTRÔLE DU NIVEAUD’HUILE

DANGERNe pas travailler sur une transmis-sion en remorque ou au mouillagedans une rivière, car l’arbre d’hélicepeut tourner.

DESCRIPTION DE LA JAUGED’HUILE (Fig. 11):1) Face supérieure du boîtier2) Jauge niveau d'huile3) Niveau d'huile4) Huile ATF5) Rondelle d’étanchéité

Le niveau d’huile peut être contrôlé àchaud ou à froid.

REMARQUE: Contrôler toujours le ni-veau de l’huile avant la mise en ser-vice de l’inverseur en intervenant de lamanière suivante :- Desserrer la jauge (fig. 11) en tour-

nant la poignée dans le sens in-verse des aiguilles d’une montre.

- Essuyer la jauge avec un chiffonpropre et sans poussière.

- Enfoncer la jauge sans visser, laretirer et controler le niveau d’huile.La niveau d’huile doit être entre leminimum et le maximum (3-4fig.11).

- Enfoncer la jauge et la verrouilleren tournant la poignée dans le sensdes aiguilles d’une montre.

ATTENTIONSelon le type et la disposition durefroidisseur et des canalisations,une certaine quantité d’huile s’ac-

cumulera puis s’écoulera dans latransmission après un temps de re-pos. Ceci peut être la raison d’unniveau d’huile dans la transmissionsupérieur à la marque du maximum.Ne pas retirer l’excédent d’huilemais procéder comme l’indiquentles paragraphes.

- Faire tourner le moteur au ralentiavec le levier de commande en po-sition neutre afin que le refroidisseuret les canalisations soient remplisde fluide.

- Arrêter le moteur et vérifier à nou-veau le niveau d’huile. Si néces-saire, compléter le niveau d’huilejusqu’à la marque sur la jauge. Leniveau d’huile sur la jauge (fig. 11)devra se situer entre les marquesmini et maxi. Le niveau d’huile de-vra etre vérifié à nouveau après unecourte période de fonctionnement.

6.1.2 VIDANGE

ATTENTIONLa première vidange de l’huile s’ef-fectuent après 25 heures de fonc-tionnement. Le suivant vidange s’ef-fectuent toutes les 300 heures ou,au minimum, une fois par an.

ATTENZIONELe lubrifiant épuisé doit être traitécomme un déchet spécial qui pol-lue l’environnement en donc éliminéen tenant compte de la structure dif-férenciée.

6.1.3 VIDANGE DE L’HUILEEnlever le bouchon (1 Fig. 12) et lais-ser couler l’huile par l’orifice qui setrouve dans la partie basse de la boîte.

6.1.4 REMPLISSAGE D’HUILERemplir avec de l’huile pour boîte devitesses automatiques ATF, en respec-tant les quantités indiquées. Ajouter laquantité retenue nécessaire pour leremplissage de l’échangeur de chaleuret des tubes de raccord correspon-dants.ZF 4-1 M: .......................... 0,30 litresZF 5 M: ............................. 0,30 litresZF 10 M: ........................... 0,35 litresZF 12 M: ........................... 0,55 litres

Page 29: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

29

Manuel de Service ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

ZF 15 M: ........................... 0,55 litresZF 15 MA: ......................... 0,50 litresZF 15 MIV: ........................ 1,00 litresZF 25 M: ........................... 0,75 litresZF 25 MA: ......................... 0,75 litresZF 30 M: . min. 0,90 - max. 1,10 litres• Valable pour une inclinaison de l’ar-

bre de moins de 20 degrés (15° pourZF MIV).

Utiliser uniquement de l’huile pour boîtede vitesses automatiques suivant lesspécifications indiquées dans la «Listedes huiles recommandée» page 82.

6.1.5 ESSAI1) Effectuer un essai après le chan-

gement d’huile.

2) Vérifier que le levier de commandeest en position neutre (N).Démarrer le moteur et le laissertourner au ralenti peu de temps afinque le refroidisseur et les canalisa-tions soient remplis d’huile.

3) Arrêter le moteur et vérifier à nou-veau le niveau d’huile. Si néces-saire, compléter le niveau avec del’huile, l’huile èxcessive devra êtreaspirée.Le niveau d’huile sur la jauge de-vra être entre les marques mini etmaxi. Le niveau d’huile devra êtrecontrolé à nouveau après unecourte période de fonctionnement.

7.1 Recherche des pannes

Commencer par vérifier que tous les points des présentes instructions d'exploitation ont été observés.

SYMPTOME CAUSE POSSIBLE REMÈDE1. Température d'huile élevée - Niveau d'huile élevé - Pomper l'huile pour redescendre

durant le fonctionnement au repère max. de la jauge

- Niveau d'huile bas - Ajouter de l'huile

- Refroidisseur encrassé - Remplacer le refroidisseur et rincer

les canalisations

- Pas d'eau dans le circuit - Vérifier le circuit de refroidissement

de refroidissement

2. Fuite d'huile - Boulons desserrés - Serrer selon les caractéristiques

- Raccords desserrés - Serrer, remplacer

- Jauge desserrée - Serrer, (remplacer)

- Niveau d'huile trop élévé - Pomper l'huile pour abasser le

niveau au repère max. de la jauge

3. Enclenchements difficiles - Commande du sélecteur - Service d'entretien

- Liaison cable de commande - Ajuster

4. Enclenchement trop lent - Commande du sélecteur - Service d'entretien

- Liaison cable de commande - Ajuster

5. Le bateau ne demarre pas - Hélice manquante - Remplacer

- Arbre d'hélice cassé - Service d'entretien

- Mauvais fonctionnement - Service d'entretien

de la transmission

- Mauvais fonctionnement du moteur - Service d'entretien

- Liaison cable de commande - Ajuster

6.1.6 STOCKAGESi la transmission reste longtempssans fonctionner, par exemple pourhivernage, il convient de la remplircomplètement par l’orifice de jaugeavec de l’huile ATF pour la protégercontre la corrosion.Il est recommandé de vider l’eau ducircuit de refroidissement.

ATTENTIONChanger l’huile lors de la nouvellemise en fonction de la transmission.

Page 30: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Manuel de Service ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

30

8.1 Caractéristiques techniques

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 5 M 2.045 1.864 0.0066 0.0088 18 25 20 27 20 27 5000 8.5 19 SAE 6, B/W

2.722 2.150 0.0047 0.0063 13 18 14 19 17 23 5000 Max input power 20 kW

Technical Data for Pleasure Craft DutyBased on engine power B to DIN 6270; shock factorK = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MA 1.875 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13.5 30 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 39 53 47 63 50 67 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 2.136 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 M 1.556 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

1.875 1.955 Max input power 55 kW.Ratio 1.556 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 12 M 2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 37 49 39 53 47 63 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 31 42 33 45 40 54 5000 Max input power 55 kW

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 95 Nm (70 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 10 M 1.482 1.864 0.0109 0.0146 30 41 33 44 38 51 5000 10.3 23 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W

1.792 1.864 Max input power 38 kW.2.045 1.864 0.0095 0.0128 27 36 29 38 34 46 5000 Ratio 1.482 «B» Pos.2.722 2.150 0.0068 0.0091 19 26 20 27 25 33 5000 max torque 95 Nm. Ratio

1.792 «B» Pos. maxtorque 95 Nm.

Page 31: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

31

Manuel de Service ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

* Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».** Max 45 kW for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MIV 2.134 2.224 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 21 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.718 2.224 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.995 2.224 Ratio 2.134 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder - K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders - K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 230 Nm (170 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 M 1.880 2.095 0.0262 0.0351 79 105 80 107 80 107 5000 18.5 41 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.273 2.095 0.0216 0.0289 65 87 78 104 80 107 5000 Max input power 80 kW.2.737 2.722 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Ratio 1.880 «B» Pos.

max torque 230 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 185 Nm (137 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 30 M 2.148 2.636 0.0241 0.0323 72 97 87 116 92 123 5000 23 51 4 & 5 Yanmar JH

2.696 2.636 Max input power 95 kW.Ratio 2.148 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.Ratio 2.696 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 169 Nm (125 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 MA 2.227 2.737 0.0215 0.0288 64 86 77 104 80 107 5000 21.1 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.737 2.737 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Max input power 80 kW.8 degrees Ratio 2.227 «B» Pos.

max torque 169 Nm.

Page 32: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Manuel de Service ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

32

9.1 Garantie

9.1.1 GARANTI LIMITÉEZF HURTH MARINE garantit les inver-seurs marins de type ZFM afin d’élimi-ner les défauts du matériel et de maind’oeuvre; ceci dans des conditionsd’utilisation et d’entretien normales.Cette garantie ne sera appliquée quesi, et seulement si, le matériel a étéinstallé et entretenu correctement.L’engagement que prend ZF HURTHMARINE dans le cadre de cette garan-tie se limite au remplacement ou à laréparation, au choix, du/des élémentsreconnus défecteux par ZF HURTHMARINE. Ces éléments doivent êtrerenvoyés au distributeur officiel ZFHURTH MARINE plus proche, en portpayé, dans un délai limité à:Vingt-quatre (24) mois à partir de miseen service ou trente-six (36) mois àpartir de la date de livraison chez lefabricant de moteurs, que ce soit l’uneou l’autre des actions qui se passe enpremier.Les engagements de ZF HURTH MA-RINE dans le cadre de la garantie pré-sentée ci-dessus doivent être compa-rés aux Procédures de Garantie qui faitentiérement partie de cette garantie -comparaison qui doit être effectuée parle distributeur ou le fabricant de mo-teurs ayant acheté le produit.Toutes les pièces en garantie doiventrevenir aux distributeurs et aux cons-tructeurs de moteurs qui ont achtetél’inverseur ZF.Cette garantie ne s’appliquera pas auxpièces réparées ou abimées quin’auraient pas obtenu préalablementl’accord écrit d’un distributeur officielde ZF HURTH MARINE.Cette garantie ne s’appliquera pas sile produit ou l’un de ces composants afait l’objet d’une mauvaise utilisation,d’une négligence, d’une modificationou d’un accident. Elle ne s’appliqerapas non plus si le produit n’a pas étéutilisé conformément aux instructionsimprimées par ZF HURTH MARINE oudans des conditions plus sévères dé-passant celles mentionnées. Elle nes’appliquera pas non plus si le produita été mal installé, réinstallé, mal entre-tenu ou encore mal utilisé. Cette ga-rantie remplace expressément toutesles autres garanties énoncées ou im-

plicites y compris les garanties com-merciales, les garanties d’utilisationappropriées et toute autre garantiesans dégât consécutif. ZF HURTHMARINE n’autorisera aucune autrepersonne à assummer, à sa place, unequelconque responsabilité en relationavec la vente d’inverseurs ZFM. ZFHURTH MARINE ne pourra en aucuncas être tenu responsable de violationde contrat si le montant de la répara-tion dépasse le prix d’achat de l’inver-seur rèducteur marin ZFM.

Page 33: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

33

Manual de Uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

ESPAÑOLContenido 1.1 Introducción .............................. 33 2.1 Identificación del inversor ........ 33 3.1 Descripción ............................... 33 4.1 Instalación ................................ 33 5.1 Funcionamiento ....................... 34 6.1 Mantenimiento .......................... 35 7.1 Búsqueda fallos ....................... 36 8.1 Datos técnicos .......................... 37 9.1 Garantía .................................... 3910.1 Lista de aceites recomendados8211.1 Lista puntos de asistencia ....... 8312.1 Planos de instalación ............... 8413.1 Warranty Card .......................... 93

1.1 Introducción

1.1.1 RESPONSABILIDAD DELCLIENTE

El cliente/usuario es responsable deefectuar los controles para asegurarque la lubricación, la refrigeración, elmantenimiento y todo lo recomenda-do en el presente manual se cumplanestrictamente a fin de lograr que el in-versor funcione de manera correcta ycon total seguridad.Cada inversor está cubierto por unagarantía, por lo tanto, para que éstasea válida, es necesario seguir estric-tamente las instrucciones presentes eneste manual.

ATENCIÓNEl fabricante no se hace responsa-ble de los daños o las pérdidas deri-vadas de una mala instalacíon, em-pleo incorrecto del equipo e insufi-ciente mantenimiento del mismo.El Cliente debe verificar que no hayaningún tipo de fuerza externa ni vi-braciones torsionales, causadas portorsión o flexión.La interacción entre motor, eje decola y hélice puede ocasionar vibra-ciones torsionales produciendo unruido constante de los engranajesque puede dañar el motor y/o el in-versor.El Fabricante no se hace responsa-ble de dichas vibraciones torsiona-les inherentes a la instalación.

Este manual se compone de tres ca-pítulos principales:

1.1.2 DESCRIPCIÓNEsta parte describe brevemente la fun-ción, la utilización y las partes del in-versor ZF M.

1.1.3 UTILIZACIÓNEn esta parte se describen todas lasinstrucciones de uso y todas las medi-das de seguridad necesarias.

1.1.4 MANTENIMIENTOEsta parte contiene todas las tareas demantenimiento y de servicio que debeefectuar el usuario.Los términos «izquierdo, derecho, ba-bor y estribor» utilizados en este ma-nual, se refieren siempre a inversoresinstalados con dirección de marchaavante.La información importante concernien-te la fiabilidad técnica y la seguridadde empleo está evidenciada de la si-guiente manera:

PELIGROTodos los procedimientos, usos,condiciones y recomendaciones,etc., que no se respeten escrupulo-samente, pueden causar daño o lamuerte del usuario.

ATENCIÓNTodos los procedimientos, usos,condiciones y recomendaciones,etc., que no se respeten escrupulo-samente, pueden dañar o destruir elequipo.

NOTA: Están referidas a aspectos téc-nicos a los cuales el usuario del equi-po debe prestar particular atención.

PELIGRO, ATENCIÓN y NOTA prece-den siempre el texto al que se refieren.

2.1 Identificacióndel inversor

La placa de identificación está aplica-da sobre el inversor.La Fig. 1 expone un ejemplo de placade identificación.A Número de serie del inversor.B Referencia de la transmisiónC Relación de transmisión de hélice

que gira en la misma dirección delmotor.

D Relación de transmisión de héliceque gira en dirección opuesta a ladel motor.

E Cada año se asigna una letra dife-rente y progresiva.

F Tipo de inversor.Significado de la denominación de losinversores:G Tipo de inversor.H Dimensión del inversorI Versión del inversor

3.1 DescripciónLos inversores marinos ZF M sontransmisiones de engranajes helicoi-dales comandadas por un mecanismoautomático.Estos se distinguen por su robustez yfiabilidad. Aún así aconsejamos que seobserven escrupulosamente las si-guientes instrucciones para la instala-ción, el uso y el mantenimiento.El incumplimiento de las instruccionescontenidas en este manual o todamodificación al inversor no autorizada,quita toda validez a la garantía.Bajo pedido el fabricante puede sumi-nistrar el manual de reparación.

Fig. 2: 1) Intercambiador 2) Brida de salida 3) Placa de identificación 4) Palanca de accionamiento. 5) Soporte telemando. 6) Campana 7) Árbol de entrada 8) Varilla nivel aceite

4.1 InstalaciónCuando se instala un inversor ZF M sedeben seguir escrupulosamente lassiguientes indicaciones:• La instalación la debe efectuar sola-

mente el personal especializado.• POSICIÓN INCLINADA (Fig. 3):

La posición de la transmisión, respec-to al árbol de entrada, no debe exce-der de un ángulo de 20° (15° paraZF MIV), en servicio continuo. Paralo que se refiere a la inclinación late-ral permitida contactar al fabricante.

• JUNTA ELÁSTICA: Entre motor einversor es necesario montar una jun-ta de unión elástica con juego radialmínimo (0.5 mm); entre inversor y ejehélice, aconsejamos una unión conjunta flexible.

Page 34: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Manual de Uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

34

• ACOPLAMIENTO MOTOR-TRANS-MISIÓN: (Fig. 4):1) Brida motor2) Volante3) Junta elástica4) Árbol del inversor5) Brida inversor6) Brida volanteValores máximos admisibles radialesy axiales X: K- 0,1 mm

• ACOPLAMIENTO TRANSMISIÓN -EJE DE HÉLICE: (Fig. 5 - 6):

• Instalar un enfriador de aceite ade-cuado.

Para más información, consultar elmanual de instalación.Tipo de aceite: ATF (Fluido Automáti-co para Transmisión) ver Cáp. 10.1.

5.1 FuncionamientoTodas las transmisiones pasan unaprueba final de funcionamiento antesdel envío.En condiciones normales de funciona-miento está permitida la inversión demarcha sólo cuando el motor se en-cuentra al ralentí. De todas formas, encaso de emergencia está permitida lainversión también a revoluciones másaltas.La correcta funcionalidad del circuitohidráulico está garantizada sólo si secambia regularmente el fluido hidráu-lico, como está previsto en el manteni-miento programado (véase capítulo6.1).Controlar visualmente, de vez en cuan-do, la presencia de eventuales pérdi-das de aceite.

PELIGROIntervenir en el inversor solamentecuando el motor y la hélice se en-cuentran parados.

ATENCIÓNEn el momento de la puesta en mar-cha la transmisión se debe llenarcon el aceite hidráulico indicado.Para el procedimiento de llenado,tipo de fluido, cantidad y nivel, verlos capítulos 6.1.4.

ATENCIÓNEl uso del inversor con una canti-dad insuficiente de aceite dañará los

engranajes. Una cantidad excesivade aceite puede causar pérdidas porlos retenes de los ejes y el respira-dero y puede hacer aumentar con-siderablemente la temperatura defuncionamiento.

5.1.1 PUESTA EN MARCHA

ATENCIÓNAntes de poner en funcionamientoel inversor controlar el nivel del acei-te (ver capítulo 6.1.1)

ATENCIÓNEn condiciones normales, la palan-ca de inversión se debe accionarcon el motor al ralentí. Las inversio-nes efectuadas a un número de re-voluciones más elevado puedenprovocar una sobrecarga de los dis-cos del embrague y esto se debeevitar durante el funcionamientonormal.

NOTA: En caso de emergencia se pue-de efectuar la inversión, de marchaavante a marcha atrás con el motor agran velocidad.

POSICIONES DE FUNCIONAMIEN-TO (figura 7):A = Dirección de rotación de la hélice

opuesta a la del motor.N = Posición neutralB = Dirección de rotación de la hélice

igual a la del motor.

PELIGROArrancar el motor solamente cuan-do la palanca de accionamiento seencuentra en posición neutral.

La temperatura normal de trabajo delaceite de la transmisión debe estarcomprendida entre los 50°C (122°F) y80°C (176°F). Es posible alcanzar sólodurante un breve periodo de tiempo lamáxima temperatura de 100°C (212°F)admitida para el aceite ATF.

ATENCIÓNSi la temperatura es demasiado ele-vada, detenga inmediatamente elmotor, controle el nivel del fluido enel inversor y asegúrese de que el

enfriaor de aceite trabaja correcta-mente. No arranque de nuevo elmotor haber que se haya eliminadola causa del mal funcionamiento.

5.1.2 NAVEGACIÓN A VELAREMOLQUE O ANCLAJE

Cuando el motor está apagado y laembarcación navega a vela, ya seaque se la remolca o bien que esté an-clada, la hélice puede girar por efectode la corriente.Esto no daña la transmisión.En una embarcación con dos motores,cuando sólo funciona uno, la hélice delmotor que está apagado puede girarlibremente.Cuando el motor está apagado la po-sición de la palanca de mando es irre-levante.

ATENCIÓNCon el eje de la hélice en posiciónlibre la posición de la palanca demando debe estar en «N» (Fig. 7).Utilizar la posición de mando con-traria a la de avance si se quiere blo-quear el eje de la hélice, de lo con-trario se provocan daños a la trans-misión.

PELIGRONo efectuar ninguna intervención enla transmisión durante el remolqueo cuando la embarcación esté an-clada en un río ya que la hélice pue-de girar.

PELIGRONo efectuar ninguna intervención enla transmisión de una instalacióndoble cuando uno de los dos moto-res esté encendido. La hélice delque está parado puede girar.

PELIGROCuando el motor gira al ralentí y sedesea que la hélice no gire (porejemplo, al cargar la batería con laembarcación parada), la palanca deaccionamiento debe encontrarse enposición neutral N (Fig. 7).Prohibido utilizar los reductoreshydraulicos en neutro a altas revo-luciones durante tiempos prolonga-dos.

Page 35: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

35

Manual de Uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

5.1.3 SISTEMA DE MANDO

ATENCIÓNControlar que el cable de mando semueva libremente.

CARRERA ÚTIL:Mod: ZF 5 M - 10 M- 12 M - 15 M - 15 MA

- 15 MIV - 25 M - 25 MA - 30 M.El trayecto útil mínimo (N-A=N-B) dela palanca de mando, medida en el ori-ficio de anclaje externo, debe ser almenos de 35 mm; y medida en el orifi-cio interno de al menos 30 mm.

Fig. 8:1) Tornillos de ajuste palanca

Par de apriete 22 ± 1 Nm2) Carrera mínima para el cable de

mando3) No desmontar la tapa de mando4) Tapón descarga aceite

Par de apriete: Ma = 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).

CARRERA ÚTIL:Mod: ZF 4-1 MLa carrera útil (N-A=N-B) de la palan-ca de mando, medida en el orificio deanclaje externo, debe ser de 38,5±1,5mm, si se mide en el orificio interno de33,5 mm. Cuando, de la posición neu-tra, la palanca girando efectúa un án-gulo de 10°-12°, la misma comienza amoverse también en dirección perpen-dicular hacia el externo y se para al fi-nal de carrera (ángulo de 40°).

Fig. 9:1) Tornillos de ajuste palanca

Par de apriete 22 ± 1 Nm2) No aflojar la tuerca3) No desmontar la tapa de mando

POSICIÓN DE LA PALANCA: En po-sición neutra se debe encontrar enposición perpendicular al cable demando. La palanca se puede girar yfijar después en cualquier posiciónmediante el tornillo de ajuste. La pa-lanca se debe encontrar a la distanciamínima de la tapa de 0,5 mm. El des-montaje, o aún solo el aflojamiento delos tornillos de la tapa, requieren unnuevo ajuste de los mismos (que debeefectuar sólo el personal autorizado).

Fig. 10:1) Varilla de aceite y tapón de llenado

del aceite (17 mm)Par de apriete: Ma = 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).

2) Distancia palanca mando de la tapamín 0,5 mm

CONTROLES: Para garantizar el buenfuncionamiento es necesario controlarcon regularidad la posición de la pa-lanca.

6.1 Mantenimiento

6.1.1 CONTROL DEL NIVELDE ACEITE

PELIGRONo efectuar ninguna intervención enla transmisión durante el remolqueo cuando la embarcación esté an-clada en un río ya que la hélice pue-de girar.

DESCRIPCIÓN VARILLA ACEITE(Fig. 11):1) Superficie caja2) Varilla nivel aceite3) Nivel aceite4) Aceite ATF5) Arandela estanca

El nivel de aceite se puede controlaren frío o en caliente.

NOTA: Controlar siempre el nivel delaceite antes de la puesta en funcióndel inversor operando del siguientemodo:- Aflojar la varilla del aceite (Fig. 11)

girándola manualmente en sentidoantihorario y extraerla.

- Limpiar la varilla con un trapo limpioy sin polvo.

- Meter la varilla sin ajustarla; sacarlay controlar que el nivel del aceite seencuentre entre las marcas de míni-mo y de máximo (3-4Fig. 11).

- Volver a introducir la varilla y blo-quearla girando en sentido horario.

ATENCIÓNAl apagar el motor, el aceite presen-te en el circuito hidráulico comen-zará a fluir a la transmisión; dichacantidad depende del tipo de enfria-dor y del circuito hidráulico usadospara la refrigeración. Después decierto tiempo el aceite se habrá re-cogido en el inversor y esto alzaráel nivel. No retirar el exceso de acei-te, sino proceder de acuerdo.

- Dejar girar el motor al ralentí con elinversor en posición neutral hastaque el enfriador de aceite y los tubosdel circuito hidráulico se hayan lle-nado de aceite.

- Apagar el motor y enseguida contro-lar el nivel del aceite; si es necesariorestablecer el nivel. El nivel del flui-do debe estar comprendido entre lasmarcas de máximo y mínimo presen-tes en la varilla (Fig. 11). Repetir laoperación después de un breve pe-riodo de funcionamiento.

6.1.2 CAMBIO DEL ACEITE

ATENCIÓNEl primer cambio de aceite se debeefectuar después de 25 horas defuncionamiento. Los sucesivoscambios de aceite se deben efectuaral menos cada 300 horas de funcio-namiento y de todas maneras nodebe pasar más de un año entre uncambio y otro.

ATENCIÓNEl lubricante usado se deberá tratarcomo desecho especial que conta-mina el ambiente: se deberá por lotanto eliminar en función de su es-tructura diferenciada.

6.1.3 VACIADO DEL ACEITEQuitar el tapón (1 Fig. 12) y hacer salirel aceite por el respectivo orificio si-tuado en la parte inferior de la caja.

6.1.4 LLENADO CONACEITE ATF

Llenar con aceite para cambios auto-máticos ATF respetando las cantida-des indicadas a continuación. Agregarla cantidad que se considere necesa-ria par el llenado del cambiador de ca-lor y de los respectivos tubos de unión.ZF 4-1 M: .......................... 0,30 litrosZF 5 M: ............................. 0,30 litrosZF 10 M: ........................... 0,35 litrosZF 12 M: ........................... 0,55 litrosZF 15 M: ........................... 0,55 litrosZF 15 MA: ......................... 0,50 litrosZF 15 MIV: ........................ 1,00 litrosZF 25 M: ........................... 0,75 litrosZF 25 MA: ......................... 0,75 litrosZF 30 M: . min. 0,90 - max. 1,10 litros• Válido para inclinación del árbol in-

ferior a 20 grados (15° para ZF MIV).

Page 36: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Manual de Uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

36

7.1 Búsqueda fallos

Antes que nada controlar si se han llevado a cabo las instrucciones indicadas en los puntos precedentes.

ANOMALÍA POSIBLE CAUSA SOLUCIÓN1. Alta temperatura del aceite - Nivel de aceite - Quitar el exceso de aceite hasta

demasiado alto. alcanzar la marca max.

en la varilla de nivel.

- Nivel de aceite bajo - Restablecer el nivel

- Enfriador - Sustituir el enfriador y controlar el

de aceite obstruido circuito del agua.

- Falta de agua en - Controlar el circuito y

el circuito. reparar la pérdida.

2. Presencia de aceite - Tornillos flojos - Apretar al par recomendado.

en la carcasa - Uniones flojas - Apretar o sustituir.

- Varilla del aceite floja - Apretar o sustituir.

- Nivel de aceite - Aspirar hasta la marca máx.

demasiado alto durante

el funcionamiento

3. Embragada dura - Bloqueo distribuidor - Consultar un centro de asistencia

- Telemando - Regulación

4. Embragada lenta - Bloqueo distribuidor - Consultar un centro de asistencia

- Telemando - Regulación

5. La embarcación no se mueve - Bloqueo distribuidor - Consultar un centro de asistencia

- Posición errónea de palanca - Regulación de la palanca de mando

- Pérdida de la hélice - Volver a instalar

- Rotura del eje hélice - Consultar un centro de asistencia

- La transmisión no funciona bien - Consultar un centro de asistencia

- El motor funciona mal - Consultar un centro de asistencia

Usar unicamente aceite para cambiosautomáticos como se especifica en la“Lista de los aceites aconsejados” enla pág.82.

6.1.5 PRUEBA DEFUNCIONAMIENTO

1) Efectuar una prueba de funciona-miento después del cambio de acei-te.

2) Posicionar la palanca de mando enposición neutral (N).Arrancar el motor y dejarlo girar al

ralentí durante un breve periodohasta que el enfriador de aceite ytambién el circuito hidráulico se lle-nen de aceite de la transmisión.

3) Parar el motor y controlar de nuevoel nivel de aceite. Si es necesario,restablecer el nivel. El aceite enexceso se debe eliminar.El nivel en la varilla de aceite debeencontrarse entre las marcas Míny Máx. Es necesario volver a con-trolar el nivel de aceite después deun breve periodo de funcionamien-to.

6.1.6 ALMACENAMIENTOSi la transmisión se almacena duranteun largo periodo, por ejemplo, duranteel invierno, se debe llenar completa-mente de aceite ATF por el orificio dela varilla de nivel, de este modo se pro-tege el grupo de la corrosión.

ATENCIÓNCambiar el aceite cuando la trans-misión se vuelva a poner en funcio-namiento.

Page 37: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

37

Manual de Uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

8.1 Datos técnicos

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 5 M 2.045 1.864 0.0066 0.0088 18 25 20 27 20 27 5000 8.5 19 SAE 6, B/W

2.722 2.150 0.0047 0.0063 13 18 14 19 17 23 5000 Max input power 20 kW

Technical Data for Pleasure Craft DutyBased on engine power B to DIN 6270; shock factorK = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MA 1.875 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13.5 30 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 39 53 47 63 50 67 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 2.136 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 M 1.556 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

1.875 1.955 Max input power 55 kW.Ratio 1.556 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 12 M 2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 37 49 39 53 47 63 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 31 42 33 45 40 54 5000 Max input power 55 kW

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 95 Nm (70 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 10 M 1.482 1.864 0.0109 0.0146 30 41 33 44 38 51 5000 10.3 23 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W

1.792 1.864 Max input power 38 kW.2.045 1.864 0.0095 0.0128 27 36 29 38 34 46 5000 Ratio 1.482 «B» Pos.2.722 2.150 0.0068 0.0091 19 26 20 27 25 33 5000 max torque 95 Nm. Ratio

1.792 «B» Pos. maxtorque 95 Nm.

Page 38: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Manual de Uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

38

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

* Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».** Max 45 kW for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MIV 2.134 2.224 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 21 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.718 2.224 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.995 2.224 Ratio 2.134 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder - K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders - K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 230 Nm (170 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 M 1.880 2.095 0.0262 0.0351 79 105 80 107 80 107 5000 18.5 41 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.273 2.095 0.0216 0.0289 65 87 78 104 80 107 5000 Max input power 80 kW.2.737 2.722 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Ratio 1.880 «B» Pos.

max torque 230 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 185 Nm (137 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 30 M 2.148 2.636 0.0241 0.0323 72 97 87 116 92 123 5000 23 51 4 & 5 Yanmar JH

2.696 2.636 Max input power 95 kW.Ratio 2.148 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.Ratio 2.696 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 169 Nm (125 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 MA 2.227 2.737 0.0215 0.0288 64 86 77 104 80 107 5000 21.1 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.737 2.737 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Max input power 80 kW.8 degrees Ratio 2.227 «B» Pos.

max torque 169 Nm.

Page 39: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

39

Manual de Uso ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

9.1 Garantía

9.1.1 CONDICIONES DELA GARANTÍA

ZF HURTH MARINE garantiza susinversores serie ZFM ante cualquierdefecto del material y/o de mano deobra siempre que se hayan utilizadoen condiciones normales y se hayaefectuado un mantenimiento correcto.Esta garantía es válida sólo si la insta-lación se ha realizado correctamentey la transmisión se ha utilizado de ma-nera correcta.ZF HURTH MARINE se obliga con estagarantía a la sustitución o a la repara-ción, a su elección, de la parte o de laspartes reconocidas como defectuosaspor ZF HURTH MARINE, después dehaberlas examinado, a condición deque la parte o las partes se entreguenal distribuidor of icial ZF HURTHMARINE más cercano, con los gas-tos de transporte pre-pagados, dentrode: Veinticuatro (24) meses a partir dela fecha instalación o treintaseis (36)meses desde la fecha de expediciónal fabricante de motores, lo que antessuceda pimero.Las obligaciones de ZF HURTHMARINE bajo la presente garantía, taly como está expresado, están ademáscondicionadas al respeto escrupolosode los Procedimientos de Garantía porparte del distribuidor o fabricante demotores que ha comercializado el pro-ducto.Todas las solicitudes de garantía sedeberán presentar al distribuidor o fa-bricante de motores que ha comercia-lizado la transmisión ZF.Esta garantía no es válida en el casode que una o más partes hayan sidoreparadas o modificadas sin el consen-timiento escrito de un vendedor oficialZF HURTH MARINE. Asimismo, lagarantía no es válida si el producto oalguno de sus componentes o partesno se han usado correctamente, antenegligencia, modificaciones o acciden-tes y si no se han seguido las instruc-ciones escritas de ZF HURTH MARINEo han funcionado en condiciones másdifíciles o no especificadas para elmencionado producto, o han sido ins-talados y utilizados de manera inco-rrecta o han tenido un mantenimientodeficiente.

Esta garantía sustituye cualquier otragarantía explícita o implícita incluyen-do la garantía de comercialización y debuen uso y otras eventuales obligacio-nes que comprendan daños indirectosderivados de la utilización del produc-to. ZF HURTH MARINE no seresponsabiliza ni autoriza a otras per-sonas a asumir en su nombre respon-sabilidades relacionadas con la ventadel inversor ZFM. ZF HURTH MARINEen ningún caso es responsable de da-ños que superen el precio de compradel inversor ZFM.

Page 40: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Bruk og Vedlijehold ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

40

NORSK

Kapittel 1.1 Eiers ansvar ............................. 40 2.1 Identifisering av giret ................ 40 3.1 Beskrivelse ............................... 40 4.1 Installasjon ............................... 40 5.1 Betjening ................................... 41 6.1 Vedlikehold ............................... 42 7.1 Feilsøking ................................. 42 8.1 Tekniske data ........................... 44 9.1 Garanti ...................................... 4610.1 Liste over anbefalt smøreolje .. 8211.1 Forhandlerliste ......................... 8312.1 Installasjons tegning ................ 8413.1 Warranty Card .......................... 93

1.1 Eiers ansvar

1.1.1 KUNDENS ANSVAREieren og brukeren har ansvar for åforeta nødvendige sikkerhetskontroller,påse at det er tilstrekkelig smøre- ogkjølemidler, samt å overholde fore-skrevne vedlikeholdsforskrifter.Alle girenheter er dekket av en garanti.Derfor: Når det gjelder håndteringen avgirenhetene, må instruksjonene i hånd-boken følges nøye.

VIKTIGProdusenten er hverken ansvarligfor feil installering, feil behandlingav utstyret eller utilstrekkelig vedli-kehold.Eieren må sikre at ytre krefter ikkevirker på utstyret gjennom torsjoneller bøying, da det skaper vibrasjon.Vekselsvirkningen mellom motor,aksel og propell kan medføretorsjonsvridning, som forårsakerhammerlignende støy og, undervisse omstendigheter, fører til ska-der på giret og motoren.HURTH er ikke ansvarlig fortorsjonsvridninger som skyldes in-stalleringen.

Brukermanualen inneholder bl.a. føl-gende tre hovedkapitler:

1.1.2 BESKRIVELSEDenne delen beskriver kort ZFM´sfunksjon, betjening og konstruksjon.

1.1.3 BETJENINGDenne delen beskriver betjening ognødvendige sikkerhetstiltak.

1.1.4 VEDLIKEHOLDDenne delen inneholder alle repara-sjons- og vedlikeholdsoppgaver someieren må utføre.Begrepene «styrbord, babord, høyre,venstre», som brukes i håndboken,refererer alltid til det installerte giret iretning fremover.Når det gjelder viktig informasjon omteknisk pålitelighet og driftssikkerhet,understrekes følgende begreper:

ADVARSEL!En drifts- eller vedlikeholds-anvisning, bruksanvisning, beskri-velse, betingelse osv., som ikke føl-ges nøye, kan føre til personskadereller dødsfall.

OBS!En drifts- eller vedlikeholds-anvisning, bruksanvisning, beskri-velse, betingelse osv., som ikke føl-ges nøye, kan føre til at utstyret blirskadet eller ødelagt.

MERK: Gjelder tekniske krav som bru-keren spesielt må passe på.

ADVARSEL!, OBS! og MERK: ståralltid foran den teksten det gjelder for.

2.1 Identifisering avgiret

Identif ikasjonsski ltet er festet påretningsvenderen.På fig. 1 ser du et eksempel på et

identifikasjonsskilt:A Girets serienr.B Gir delenummerC Utvekslingsforhold Propell, samme

rotasjon som motorenD Utvekslingsforhold Propell, motsatt

rotasjon av motoren.E Hvert år blir det brukt et nytt

progressivt skrifttegn.F GirtypeBetydningen av betegnelsen på giret:G GirtypeH StørrelseI Girversjon

3.1 BeskrivelsePropell, samme rotasjonsretning sommotorensZF M-vendegirene er hydrauliske medrett tannhjulsutveksling.De er robuste og pålitelige. Likevel kre-ver de at monteringen gjøres i henholdtil denne anvisningen, og at brukerenoverholder forskriftene for betjening ogvedlikehold.Hvis man ikke overholder dette, harman ingen garantikrav.Servicehåndboken fås hos produsenten.

Fig. 2: 1) Varmeveksler 2) Utgangsflens 3) Identifikasjonsskilt 4) Girvelgerarm 5) Bøyle for fjernstyring 6) Klokke 7) Inngangsaksel 8) Oljepeilepinne.

4.1 InstallasjonNår HURTH´s ZF-gir monteres, måman ta hensyn til følgende punkter:• Monteringen må kun utføres av en

spesialist• SKRÅSTILLING (Fig. 3):

Girets posisjon i forhold til inngangs-akselen må ikke overskride en vin-kel på 20° (15° for ZF MIV) i kontinu-

Page 41: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

41

Bruk og Vedlijehold ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

erlig drift. Tillatt sidehelning fås vedforespørsel hos produsenten.

• KOBLINGER: Vrielastisk koblingmed radial frigang (minst 0,5 mm) ernødvendig på motorsiden. Bøye-elastisk kobling anbefales på propell-siden.

• MOTOR-GIR-FORBINDELSE: (Fig. 4):1) Motorflens2) Svinghjul3) Kobling4) Giraksel5) Girflens6) SvinghjulshusTillatt radial- og planavvik X: P- 0,1 mm

• GIR-PROPELLAKSEL-FORBIN-DELSE (Fig. 5 - 6):

• Velg passende kjølerDetal jert informasjon finner du iinstallasjonshåndboken.Oljesorter: ATF (Automatic Trans-mission Fluid) se kapittel 10.1.

5.1 BetjeningAlle ZF-girene prøvekjøres før levering.Under normaldrift bør giret kun skiftesnår motoren går på tomgangsturtall.I nødsituasjoner kan man også skiftegir ved høyere turtall.Hydraulikkretsen fungerer korrekt barehvis hydraulikkvæsken skiftes ut medjevne mellomrom (se kapittel 6.1).Visuelle kontroller av lekkasjer må fore-tas fra tid til annen.

ADVARSEL!Arbeid på giret og propellene måkun gjennomføres når giret og pro-pellene står stille.

OBS!Før giret tas i bruk, må man fylle pågirolje. Prosedyre, oljetype, fyll-mengde osv. finner du i kapittel 6.1.4.

OBS!Brukes giret med for lav oljestand,

resulterer det i skader på giret. Forhøy oljestand kan forårsake lekka-sjer på tetningene og lufteåpningen,og øke driftstemperaturen betrakte-lig. Vi anbefaler bruk av temperatur-føler.

5.1.1 BETJENINGSPROSEDYRE

OBS!Kontroller oljestanden før oppstart(se kapittel 6,1,1).

OBS!Under normaldrift bør man kunskifte gir når motoren går påtomgangsturtall. Skifter man gir vedhøyere turtall, kan det føre til over-belastning av koblingen, og bør der-for unngås under normaldrift.

MERK: I en nødsituasjon kan endrin-gen av kjøreretningen, fra fremover tilrevers, utføres med høy motor-hastighet.

GIRSKIFETPOSISJONER (bilde 8):A = propellrotasjon motsatt av motor-

rotasjonN = tomgang (nøytral)B = propellrotasjon i samme retning

som motorrotasjon

ADVARSEL!Start kun motoren i girposisjon “N”(nøytral).

Normal driftstemperatur for giret skalligge mellom 50° C (120° F) og 80° C(176° F). Maks.ti l latte ATF ol je-temperatur på 100° C (212° F) skal kunoppnås for kort tid.

OBS!Hvis oljetemperaturen er for høy, slåav motoren, kontroller girolje-standen og om oljekjøleren har rik-

tig vanngjennomstrømning. Ikkestart motoren igjen før feilen er fjer-net.

5.1.2 SEILING, SLEPINGELLER OPPANKRING

Når motoren er slått av og båten sei-ler, slepes eller er ankret opp, kan pro-pellen rotere som følge av strømmen.Det innebærer ingen risiko for giret.På en båt med to motorer kan propel-len til den motoren, som ikke er i bruk,gå fritt på tomgang. Når motoren erslått av, er det uvesentlig hvilken posi-sjon girvelgerarmen står i.

OBS!Avec l’arbre d’hélice en marche àvide, le levier de commande doit êtredans la position «N» (Fig. 7). Utilisezla position de commande contraireà la direction de course pour bloquerl’arbre de l’hélice, pour éviter unendommagement de la transmission.

ADVARSEL!Ikke arbeid på giret når båten sle-pes eller er ankret opp i en elv, fordipropellen kan rotere.

ADVARSEL!Ikke arbeid på giret til en båt medto motorer når en av motorene går,fordi propellen til det giret, som erslått av, kan rotere.

ADVARSEL!Når motoren går på tomgang ogpropellakselen ikke skal drives(f.eks. når batteriet lades opp medgenerator), må girvelgerarmen(bilde 7) holdes i nøytral (N), for atbåten ikke skal bevege seg.En hydraulisk girkasse som står ineutral må ikke kjøres på annet enntomgangsturtall.

Page 42: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Bruk og Vedlijehold ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

42

5.1.3 KONTROLLSYSTEMER

OBS!Pass på at styrestang/kabel går lett

GIRVELGERARMENS BEVEGELSE:Mod: ZF 5 M - 10 M- 12 M - 15 M - 15 MA

- 15 MIV - 25 M - 25 MA - 30 M.Girvelgerarmens bevegelse (N-A=N-B)må minst være 35 mm for ytre dreie-punkt og 30 mm for indre dreiepunkt.

Fig. 8:1) Klemskrue tiltreknings-moment

22 ± 1 Nm2) Minimum girarmbevegelse for

styrekabelen3) Ikke løsne dekselet4) Bunnplugg

Tiltrekningsmoment: Ma = 22 Nm(16 lb-ft).

GIRVELGERARMENS BEVEGELSE:Mod: ZF 4-1 MGirvelgerarmens bevegelse (N-A=N-B)må være 38,5±1,5 mm for ytre dreie-punkt og 33,5±1,5 mm for indre dreie-punkt, fra nøytralstilling. Når girvelger-armen når en vinkel på 10°-12°, begyn-ner den også å bevege seg vinkelrettutover og stopper ved endeanslag (vin-kel på 40°).

Fig. 9:1) Klemskrue tiltreknings-moment

22 ± 1 Nm2) Ikke løsne mutteren3) Ikke løsne dekselet

GIRVELGERARMENS STILLING inøytral posisjon er rettvinklet på styres-tang/kabel. Girvelgerarmen kan festesi en hvilken som helst stilling med enklemskrue.Avstanden girvelgerarm/deksel måvære minst 0,5 mm. Når dekselet løs-nes, kreves det etterjustering (kun avfagperson).

Fig. 10:1) Oljepeilepinneskrue og oljefylle-

skrue, 17 mmTiltrekningsmoment: Ma = 20 Nm(15 lb-ft).

2) Girvelgerarmavstand min. 0,5 mm

KONTROLLER: For å kunne garan-tere korrekt funksjon er det nødvendigå kontrollere girvelgerarmen med jevnemellomrom.

6.1 Vedlikehold

6.1.1 KONTROLL AVOLJESTANDEN

ADVARSEL!Vedlikeholdsarbeider på giret måkun utføres mens motoren stårstille. Ha alltid hansker på når duarbeider på et varmt gir.

BESKRIVELSE AV OLJEPEILE-PINNEN (bilde 11):1) Husets overflate2) Peilestav3) Oljenivå4) ATF-olje5) Tetningsskive.

Oljestanden kan kontrolleres i varmeller kald tilstand.

MERK: Kontroller alltid oljenivået førretningsvenderen startes opp. Gå fremsom følger:- Vri håndtaket på oljepeilepinnen (bilde

11) mot urviseren og trekk den ut.- Tørk av peilepinnen med en ren,

støvfri fille.- Sett inn peilepinnen i boringen på

huset uten å skru til, trekk den utigjen og les av oljestanden. Olje-nivået må være mellom min.- ogmaks.merket på peilepinnen (3-4bilde 11).

- Sett inn peilepinnen og skru den fastmed urviseren.

OBS!Avhengig av type og innretning avkjøler og ledninger vil det samle segen bestemt oljemengde etter at mo-toren er slått av.Oljen vil flyte tilbake i giret ved enlengre stillstandsperiode. Dette kanføre til at oljestanden i giret oversti-ger maks.merket. Ikke fjern giroljensom er over maks.merket. Følgfremgangsmåten.

- Start motoren og la motoren gå påtomgangsturtall, til kjøleren og led-ningene er fylt med girolje.

- Slå av motoren og kontroller olje-standen på nytt. Etterfyll olje hvis deter nødvendig. Riktig oljestand ernådd når oljen er mellom min.- ogmaks.merket på peilepinnen (bilde11). Kontroller oljen igjen etter en kortkjøretid.

6.1.2 OLJESKIFT

OBS!Det første oljeskiftet må foretas et-ter 25 driftstimer.Alle senere oljeskift foretas hver 300.driftstime eller en gang i året.

OBS!Brukt olje må beregnes som spesi-alavfall som forurenser miljøet. Oljeskal derfor kildesorteres.

6.1.3 TØMME GIROLJEFjern bunnpluggen (1 fig. 12) og la ol-jen renne ut av det dertil bestemte hul-let nederst på huset.

6.1.4 PÅFYLLING AV GIROLJEFyll på med olje for ATF automatgir.Overhold mengdene som oppgis ned-enfor. Fyll på nødvendig mengde for åfylle varmeveksleren og tilhørendekoplingsrør.

Page 43: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

43

Bruk og Vedlijehold ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

7.1 Feilsøking

Sjekk først om alle forskriftene i brukerveiledningen er overholdt.

FEIL MULIG ÅRSAK UTBEDRING1. Høy oljetemperatur - Oljestanden er for høy - Pump ut olje til maks. merket

under drift på peilestaven vises

- For lav oljestand - Etterfyll olje

- Tilstoppet kjøler, eller innskrenket - Skift kjøleren og spyl

vanngjennomstrømning vannledningene

- Ikke noe vann i kjølersystemet - Kontroller kjølersystemet og

evt. reparer det

2. Olje på girhuset - Løse skruer - Trekk til iht. spesifikasjon

- Løse skrueforbindelser - Trekk til, skift ut

- Oljepeilepinnen sitter ikke fast - Skyv den inn til anslag, bytt ut

- Oljestanden er for høy - Pump ut olje til maks. merket på

under drift peilestaven vises

3. Hard å gire - Velgerinnretningen - Rådspør reparasjonsverksted

- Stengene - Stilles inn/justeres

4. Girene kommer sent i - Velgerinnretningen - Rådspør reparasjonsverksted

inngrep - Stengene - Stilles inn/justeres

5. Ingen bevegelse av båten - Velgerinnretningen - Rådspør reparasjonsverksted

- Girvelgerarmen er ikke - Sørg for at den går i inngrep

ordentlig i inngrep

- Propellen er falt av - Monter ny propell

- Propellen er brukket - Rådspør reparasjonsverksted

- Funksjonsfeil på giret - Rådspør reparasjonsverksted

- Funksjonsfeil på motoren - Rådspør reparasjonsverksted

ZF 4-1 M: .......................... 0,30 LiterZF 5 M: ............................. 0,30 LiterZF 10 M: ........................... 0,35 LiterZF 12 M: ........................... 0,55 LiterZF 15 M: ........................... 0,55 LiterZF 15 MA: ......................... 0,50 LiterZF 15 MIV: ........................ 1,00 LiterZF 25 M: ........................... 0,75 LiterZF 25 MA: ......................... 0,75 LiterZF 30 M: . min. 0,90 - maks. 1,10 liter• Gyldig for helning av akselen under

20 grader (15° for ZF MIV).Bruk kun olje for automatgir som spe-sifisert i “Listen over anbefalte oljer” påside 82.

6.1.5 PRØVEKJØRING1) Foreta en prøvekjøring etter olje-

skiftet.2) Sett girvelgerarmen i nøytral posi-

sjon (N). Start motoren og la dengå litt på tomgang, til oljekjølerenog ledningene er fylt med girolje.

3) Slå av motoren og kontroller olje-standen på nytt. Etterfyll olje hvis deter nødvendig. Pump ut overflødigolje.Riktig oljestand er nådd når oljener mellom min.- og maks. merketpå peilepinnen. Kontroller oljenigjen etter en kort kjøretid.

6.1.6 LAGRINGHvis giret lagres i lengre tid, f.eks. omvinteren, må giret fylles opp til randenmed foreskrevet ATF-girolje gjennomhullet til peilepinnen, for å beskytte denmot korrosjon.

OBS!Foreta et oljeskift når det tas i brukigjen.

Page 44: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Bruk og Vedlijehold ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

44

8.1 Tekniske data

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 5 M 2.045 1.864 0.0066 0.0088 18 25 20 27 20 27 5000 8.5 19 SAE 6, B/W

2.722 2.150 0.0047 0.0063 13 18 14 19 17 23 5000 Max input power 20 kW

Technical Data for Pleasure Craft DutyBased on engine power B to DIN 6270; shock factorK = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MA 1.875 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13.5 30 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 39 53 47 63 50 67 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 2.136 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 M 1.556 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

1.875 1.955 Max input power 55 kW.Ratio 1.556 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 12 M 2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 37 49 39 53 47 63 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 31 42 33 45 40 54 5000 Max input power 55 kW

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 95 Nm (70 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 10 M 1.482 1.864 0.0109 0.0146 30 41 33 44 38 51 5000 10.3 23 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W

1.792 1.864 Max input power 38 kW.2.045 1.864 0.0095 0.0128 27 36 29 38 34 46 5000 Ratio 1.482 «B» Pos.2.722 2.150 0.0068 0.0091 19 26 20 27 25 33 5000 max torque 95 Nm. Ratio

1.792 «B» Pos. maxtorque 95 Nm.

Page 45: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

45

Bruk og Vedlijehold ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

* Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».** Max 45 kW for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MIV 2.134 2.224 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 21 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.718 2.224 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.995 2.224 Ratio 2.134 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder - K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders - K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 230 Nm (170 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 M 1.880 2.095 0.0262 0.0351 79 105 80 107 80 107 5000 18.5 41 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.273 2.095 0.0216 0.0289 65 87 78 104 80 107 5000 Max input power 80 kW.2.737 2.722 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Ratio 1.880 «B» Pos.

max torque 230 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 185 Nm (137 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 30 M 2.148 2.636 0.0241 0.0323 72 97 87 116 92 123 5000 23 51 4 & 5 Yanmar JH

2.696 2.636 Max input power 95 kW.Ratio 2.148 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.Ratio 2.696 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 169 Nm (125 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 MA 2.227 2.737 0.0215 0.0288 64 86 77 104 80 107 5000 21.1 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.737 2.737 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Max input power 80 kW.8 degrees Ratio 2.227 «B» Pos.

max torque 169 Nm.

Page 46: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Bruk og Vedlijehold ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

46

9.1 Garanti

9.1.1 GARANTIVILKÅRZF HURTH MARINE garanterer atZFM vendegir er fritt for mangler nårdet gjelder materiale og bearbeidingved normalt bruk og vedlikehold, medforbehold om at garantien kun gjelderdersom utstyret er blitt riktig installertog drevet. Forpliktelsen til ZF HURTHMARINE under denne garantien erbegrenset til, etter eget valg, å skifte uteller reparere samtlige deler, som ZFHURTH MARINE har undersøkt ogfastslått er defekte, dersom delen ellerdelene returneres til nærmeste for-handler av ZF HURTH MARINE, be-talt for frakt og innen fristen:Tjuefire (24) måneder fra leveringsdatotil kunden og trettiseks (36) månederfra leveringsdato til motorprodusenten,hva som enn inntrer først.ZF HURTH MARINE´s forpliktelserunder denne garantien gjelder medforbehold om at forhandleren ellermotorprodusenten, som har kjøpt pro-duktet, har oppfylt garantiprosedyrene,som utgjør en del av denne kontrak-ten.Samtlige garantikrav skal foreleggesfor forhandlerne og motor-produsentene, som har kjøpt giret.Denne garantien gjelder ikke de delenesom er blitt reparert eller modifisertuten skriftlig tillatelse fra en autorisertZF HURTH MARINE-forhandler.Denne garantien gjelder ikke hvis pro-duktet eller en av komponentene ellerdelene er blitt gjenstand for misbruk,uforsiktighet, modifisering eller uhell,eller ikke er drevet i henhold til de trykteinstruksjonene fra ZF HURTH MA-RINE, eller er drevet under betingel-ser som er hardere eller på annen måteoverskrider betingelsene som er fast-lagt for dette produktet i spesifikasjo-nene, eller ikke er blitt forskriftsmessiginstallert eller blitt bygd inn igjen, eller

feilaktig vedlikeholdt eller drevet.Denne garantien går foran andreuttrykkelige eller impliserte garantier,inklusive de for lettselgelig kvalitet ogdugelighet ved bruk, samt alle andreforpliktelser, bl.a. inkl. indirekte følge-skader. ZF HURTH MARINE overtaringen ytterligere forpliktelser i forbin-delse med salg av giret, og ZF HURTHMARINE gir heller ingen personer ioppdrag å overta noen slik forpliktelse.ZF HURTH MARINE er ikke undernoen omstendigheter ansvarlig for noegarantibrudd på et beløp som liggerover innkjøpsprisen av giret.

Page 47: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

47

Manual de Operação ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

PORTUGUÊSContido 1.1 Introdução ................................ 47 2.1 Identificação do Reversor ........ 47 3.1 Descrição .................................. 47 4.1 Instalação ................................. 47 5.1 Operação .................................. 48 6.1 Manutenção .............................. 49 7.1 Problemas e soluções ............. 50 8.1 Dados Técnicos ....................... 51 9.1 Garantia .................................... 5310.1 Lista de fluidos recomendados 8211.1 Lista de concesionários ........... 8312.1 Desenhos de instalação .......... 8413.1 Warranty Card .......................... 93

1.1 Introdução

1.1.1 RESPONSABILIDADEDO CLIENTE

O Cliente/Usuário é responsável porefetuar as verificações de segurançanecessárias para assegurar que a lu-brificação, o arrefecimento, a manuten-ção e as práticas recomendadas nopresente manual sejam cumpridas es-tritamente a fim de proporcionar o fun-cionamento correto e com total segu-rança do reversor.Cada unidade reversora está cobertapor uma garantia, portanto: Para quea mesma seja válida, as instruçõesrelativas ao reversor mencionadasneste manual deverão ser rigorosa-mente seguidas.

ATENÇÃOO fabricante não se responsabilizapor quaisquer danos ou prejuízoscausados por instalação inadequa-da, operação incorreta e/ou manu-tenção insuficiente do equipamen-to.O Cliente deve se certificar de quesejam evitadas toda e qualquer for-ça externa ou vibração causada portorção e flexão.A interação entre o motor, o eixo e ahélice pode ocasionar vibração portorção, produzindo um ruído cons-tante de impacto das engrenagens,capaz de danificar o motor e/ou oreversor.O Fornecedor não pode ser respon-sabilizado por tal vibração causadapor torção inerente à instalação.

Este manual inclui, entre outras coisas,os seguintes três capítulos principais:

1.1.2 DESCRIÇÃOEsta parte descreve brevemente a fun-ção, a operação e os principais com-ponentes do reversor ZF M.

1.1.3 OPERAÇÃOEsta parte descreve os procedimentosde operação e todas as medidas desegurança necessárias.

1.1.4 MANUTENÇÃOEsta parte contém todas as tarefas demanutenção e de serviço que o usuá-rio deve efetuar.Os termos “esquerdo, direito, bombor-do e estibordo” utilizados neste manu-al se referem sempre a reversores ins-talados com direção de marcha à fren-te.As informações importantes referen-tes à confiabilidade técnica e à segu-rança de operação são evidenciadasda seguinte maneira:

PERIGOTodos os procedimentos, práticas,condições e recomendações, etc.,que não forem respeitados rigoro-samente, podem causar ferimentosou morte de pessoas.

ATENÇÃOTodos os procedimentos, práticas,condições e recomendações, etc.,que não forem respeitados rigoro-samente, podem danificar ou des-truir o equipamento.

NOTA: Refere-se a aspectos técnicosaos quais o usuário do equipamentodeve prestar particular Atenção.

PERIGO, ATENÇÃO e NOTA sempreprecedem o texto ao qual se referem.

2.1 Identificação doReversor

A placa de identificação está aplicadano inversor.A Fig. 1 mostra um exemplo de placade identificação:A Número de série do reversorB Código de peça do reversorC Relação de transmissão para héli-

ce que gira na mesma direção domotor.

D Relação de transmissão para héli-ce que gira em direção oposta àdo motor.

E A cada ano uma nova letra é de-signada em ordem crescente.

F Tipo de reversorSignificado dos códigos da transmis-são:G Tipo de reversorH Tamanho da transmissãoI Versão da transmissão

3.1 DescriçãoOs reversores marítimos ZF M sãotransmissões de engrenagens helicoi-dais comandadas por um mecanismoautomático.Eles se distinguem por sua construçãorobusta e extrema confiabilidade. Ape-sar disso, aconselhamos que o usuá-rio observe rigorosamente as seguin-tes instruções para sua instalação,operação e manutenção.O não cumprimento das instruçõescontidas neste manual, ou toda modi-ficação não autorizada do reversor, in-validará toda e qualquer solicitação degarantia.Mediante pedido, o fabricante poderáfornecer um Manual de Reparação.

Fig. 2: 1) Radiador de óleo 2) Flange de saída 3) Placa de identificação 4) Alavanca de comando. 5) Estribo de comando à distância. 6) Campânula. 7) Eixo de entrada 8) Vareta de medição

4.1 InstalaçãoAo instalar um reversor ZFM, é neces-sário seguir rigorosamente as seguin-tes indicações:• A instalação deve ser efetuada so-

mente por pessoal especializado.• POSIÇÃO INCLINADA: (Fig. 3):

A posição da transmissão, relativa-mente ao eixo de entrada, não deveexceder um ângulo de 20° (15° paraZF MIV), durante o funcionamentocontínuo. Em referência à inclinaçãolateral permitida, entre em contatocom o fabricante.

• ACOPLAMENTOS: É necessárioinstalar um acoplamento elástico àtorção com folga radial mínima (0,5mm) entre o motor e o reversor.

Page 48: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Manual de Operação ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

48

É recomendável instalar um acopla-mento elástico flexível entre o rever-sor e o eixo da hélice.

• CONEXÃO MOTOR-REVERSOR(Fig. 4):1) Flange do motor2) Volante3) Acoplamento elástico4) Eixo do reversor5) Flange do reversor6) Alojamento do volanteExcentricidade máxima admissível,radial e axial X: B - 0,1 mm

• CONEXÃO REVERSOR - EIXO DAHÉLICE (Fig. 5 - 6):

• Instale um radiador de óleo adequa-do.

Para mais informações, consulte omanual de instalação.Tipo de óleo: ATF (fluido para transmis-são automática). Veja o capítulo 10.1.

5.1 OperaçãoTodas as transmissões passam por umteste de funcionamento antes do em-barque.Em condições normais de funciona-mento, a reversão de marcha somen-te deverá ser efetuada com o motorem marcha-lenta. Em caso de emer-gência, a reversão em rotações maisaltas também é admissível.O funcionamento correto do circuitohidráulico só é garantido se o fluidohidráulico for trocado regularmente,conforme indicado na manutençãoprogramada. (Consulte o capítulo 6.1).Periodicamente, faça uma inspeçãovisual à procura de eventuais vaza-mentos de óleo.

PERIGOSomente efetue serviços noreversor com o motor desligado e ahélice parada.

ATENÇÃOAntes da colocação em marcha, oreversor deverá ser abastecido como fluido de transmissão indicado.Para o procedimento de abasteci-mento, tipo, quantidade e nível defluido, e para a troca do fluido, vejacapítulo 6.1.4.

ATENÇÃOO uso do reversor com uma quanti-

dade insuficiente de óleo danifica-rá as engrenagens. Uma quantida-de excessiva de óleo pode causarvazamentos pelos retentores doseixos e respiro, além de causar umaumento excessivo da temperaturade funcionamento.

5.1.1 PROCEDIMENTO DEOPERAÇÃO

ATENÇÃOAntes de colocar o reversor em fun-cionamento, verifique o nível doóleo (veja o capítulo 6.1.1).

ATENÇÃOEm condições normais, a alavanca decomando somente deve ser acionadacom o motor em marcha-lenta. As re-versões efetuadas em uma rotaçãomais elevada podem provocar umasobrecarga dos discos da embrea-gem e devem ser evitadas durante ofuncionamento normal.

NOTA: Em caso de emergência é pos-sível efetuar a reversão, de marcha àfrente a marcha à ré, com o motor emalta rotação.

POSIÇÕES DE COMANDO (Fig. 7):A = Direção de rotação da hélice opos-

ta à do motor.N = Posição neutraB = Direção de rotação da hélice igual

à do motor.

PERIGOSomente dê partida no motor com aalavanca de comando na posiçãoneutra.

A temperatura normal de trabalho doóleo do reversor deve permanecerentre 50°C (122°F) e 80°C (176°F). Atemperatura máxima de 100°C (212°F)admissível para o óleo ATF somentepode ser mantida durante um curtoperíodo.

ATENÇÃOCaso a temperatura do fluido se ele-ve excessivamente, desligue o mo-tor imediatamente, verifique o níveldo fluido no reversor e assegure-sequanto ao fluxo correto de água no

radiador de óleo. Não dê partidanovamente no motor sem primeiroeliminar a causa do mau funciona-mento.

5.1.2 NAVEGAÇÃO À VELA,REBOQUE OU ANCORAGEM

Quando o motor está desligado e aembarcação navega à vela, indepen-dentemente dela estar sendo rebocadaou estar ancorada, a hélice pode ro-dar pelo efeito da corrente.Isso não danifica o reversor.Em uma embarcação com dois moto-res, quando somente um deles funci-ona, a hélice do reversor não utilizadopode girar livremente.Quando o motor está desligado, a po-sição da alavanca de comando éirrelevante.

ATENÇÃOCom o eixo da hélice em posiçãoneutra, a alavanca de comando de-verá estar na posição «N» (Fig.7).Utilize a posição de comando con-trária à de deslocamento a fim detravar o eixo da hélice. Caso con-trário, o reversor será danificado.

PERIGONão efetue nenhum serviço noreversor durante o reboque ou coma embarcação ancorada em um rio,já que a hélice poderá girar.

PERIGONão efetue nenhum serviço noreversor de uma embarcação demotorização dupla quando um dosmotores estiver ligado. O eixo dahélice do reversor inoperante irágirar.

PERIGOQuando o motor gira em marcha-lenta e se deseja que a hélice nãogire (por exemplo, ao carregar abateria com o gerador), a alavancade comando (Fig. 7) deverá sermantida na posição neutra (N) paraevitar que a embarcação se movi-mente. Evite utilizar o reversor hi-dráulico em neutro com altas rota-ções do motor durante um períodoprolongado.

Page 49: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

49

Manual de Operação ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

5.1.3 SISTEMA DE COMANDO

ATENÇÃOAssegure-se que a haste ou cabo decomando se movam livremente.

CURSO ÚTIL DA ALAVANCA:Mod: ZF 5 M - 10 M- 12 M - 15 M - 15 MA

- 15 MIV - 25 M - 25 MA - 30 M.O curso útil mínimo (N-A=N-B) da ala-vanca de comando deve ser de 35 mmpara o orifício posicionador externo ede 30 mm para o orifício posicionadorinterno.

Fig. 8:1) Torque dos parafusos de fixação da

alavanca 22 ± 1 Nm2) Corsa minima per il cavo di coman-

do.3) Não abra a tampa de comando4) Bujão de drenagem de óleo

Torque de aperto: Ma = 22 Nm (16lb-ft).

CURSO ÚTIL DA ALAVANCA:Mod: ZF 4-1 MO curso útil mínimo (N-A=N-B) da ala-vanca de comando deve ser de 38,5 ±1,5 mm para o orifício posicionadorexterno e de 33,5±1,5 mm para o orifí-cio posicionador interno, a partir daposição neutra. A partir da posiçãoneutra, após girar por um ângulo de10°-12°, a alavanca começa a se mo-ver para fora perpendicularmente epára ao final do curso (ângulo de 40°).

Fig. 9:1) Torque dos parafusos de fixação da

alavanca 22 ± 1 Nm2) Não afrouxe a porca3) Não abra a tampa de comando

POSIÇÃO DA ALAVANCA: Na posi-ção neutra, ela permanece em posi-ção perpendicular à haste ou cabo decomando. A alavanca de comandopoderá ser girada e fixada em qualquerposição por meio do parafuso de fixa-ção. A distância mínima entre a ala-vanca de mudança e a tampa deve serde 0,5 mm. Caso os parafusos sejamafrouxados ou a tampa removida, seránecessário um novo ajuste (a serefetuado somente por pessoal autori-zado).

Fig. 10:1) Vareta medidora e tampa do gar-

galo de abastecimento de óleo (17mm)Torque de aperto: Ma = 20 Nm (15lb-ft).

2) Folga mínima da alavanca de co-mando 0,5 mm

CONTROLES: visando garantir o bomfuncionamento, é necessário controlara posição da alavanca regularmente.

6.1 Manutenção

6.1.1 VERIFICAÇÃO DO NÍVELDE FLUIDO

PERIGONão efetue nenhum serviço noreversor durante o reboque ou coma embarcação ancorada em um rio,já que a hélice poderá girar.

DESCRIÇÃO DA VARETA DE MEDI-ÇÃO (Fig. 11):1) Superfície do alojamento2) Vareta de medição3) Nível de óleo4) Óleo ATF5) Arruela de vedação.

O nível de óleo do reversor pode serverificado a frio ou a quente.

NOTA: Controle sempre o nível de óleoantes de pôr o inversor a funcionar pro-cedendo conforme indicado a seguir.- Remova a vareta de medição (Fig. 11)

girando-a em sentido anti-horário.- Limpe a vareta com um pano limpo

e sem pó.- Coloque a vareta sem parafusá-la.

Retire-a e verifique se o nível do óleose encontra entre as marcas de mí-nimo e de máximo (3-4Fig. 11).

- Introduza novamente a vareta e pa-rafuse-a girando em sentido horário.

ATENÇÃOAo desligar o motor, o óleo presen-te no circuito hidráulico começaráa fluir para o reversor; essa quanti-dade depende do tipo de radiador ecircuito hidráulico usados para oarrefecimento. Depois de certo tem-po, isso aumentará o nível de óleono reversor. Não retire o excesso deóleo, mas proceda de acordo comos itens.

- Mantenha o motor em marcha-lentacom a alavanca de comando na po-sição neutra até que o radiador deóleo e os tubos do circuito hidráulicotenham se preenchido de óleo.

- Desligue o motor e, em seguida, ve-rifique o nível do óleo.Se necessário,complete o nível até ficar entre asmarcas de máximo e mínimo davareta de medição (Fig. 11). Repita aoperação depois de um breve perío-do de funcionamento.

6.1.2 TROCA DO ÓLEO

ATENÇÃOA primeira troca de óleo deve serefetuada depois de 25 horas de fun-cionamento. Todas as trocas deóleo posteriores deverão serefetuadas a cada 300 horas de fun-cionamento ou um ano, o que ocor-rer primeiro.

ATENÇÃOO lubrificante usado deve ser trata-do como resíduo especial que po-lui o ambiente: portanto, deve sereliminado em função da sua estru-tura diferenciada.

6.1.3 DRENAGEM DO ÓLEORemova o bujão (1 Fig. 12) e deixe oóleo escoar pelo furo próprio situadona parte inferior da caixa.

6.1.4 ABASTECIMENTOCOM ÓLEO ATF

Encha com óleo para caixas de velo-cidades automáticas ATF respeitandoas quantidades indicadas a seguir.Acrescente a quantidade que conside-ra necessária para o enchimento dopermutador de calor e dos respectivostubos de ligaçã.ZF 4-1 M: .......................... 0,30 litrosZF 5 M: ............................. 0,30 litrosZF 10 M: ........................... 0,35 litrosZF 12 M: ........................... 0,55 litrosZF 15 M: ........................... 0,55 litrosZF 15 MA: ......................... 0,50 litrosZF 15 MIV: ........................ 1,00 litrosZF 25 M: ........................... 0,75 litrosZF 25 MA: ......................... 0,75 litrosZF 30 M: . mín. 0,90 - máx. 1,10 litros• Válido para inclinação do eixo inferi-

or a 20 graus (15° para ZF MIV).

Page 50: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Manual de Operação ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

50

7.1 Problemas e soluções

Antes de qualquer verificação, certifique-se de que todas as instruções indicadas tenham sido cumpridas.

SINTOMA POSSÍVEL CAUSA SOLUÇÃO1. Alta temperatura do óleo - Nível de óleo demasiado alto durante - Remova o excesso de óleo até alcançar

o funcionamento a marca máx. da vareta de medição

- Nível baixo de óleo - Adicione óleo

- Obstrução ou restrição - Substitua o resfriador e limpe o sistema

de água do resfriador de óleo

- Falta de água no sistema de arrefecimento - Verifique e repare o sistema de

arrefecimento

2. Presença de óleo no - Parafusos frouxos - Aperte no torque especificado

alojamento do reversor - Conexões frouxas - Aperte ou substitua

- Vareta de medição do óleo frouxa - Aperte ou substitua

- Nível de óleo alto durante o funcionamento - Remova o excesso de óleo até alcançar

a marca máx. da vareta de medição

3. Dificuldade de comando - Comando do seletor - Consulte a assistência técnica

- Comando remoto - Efetue a regulagem

4. Engate demorado - Comando do seletor - Consulte a assistência técnica

- Comando remoto - Efetue a regulagem

5. A embarcação não se move - Comando do seletor - Consulte a assistência técnica

- Posição incorreta do seletor - Efetue a regulagem

- Perda da hélice - Substitua

- Ruptura do eixo da hélice - Consulte a assistência técnica

- Falha no reversor - Consulte a assistência técnica

- Falha no motor - Consulte a assistência técnica

Use exclusivamente óleo para caixasde velocidades automáticas, conformeespecificações indicadas na «Lista deóleos recomendados» na pág. 82.

6.1.5 TESTE DEFUNCIONAMENTO

1) Efetue um teste de funcionamentodepois da troca de óleo.

2) Coloque a alavanca de comando naposição neutra (N). Dê partida nomotor e mantenha-o em marcha-lenta durante um breve período até

que o radiador de óleo e o circuitohidráulico sejam preenchidos comóleo.

3) Desligue o motor e verifique nova-mente o nível de óleo. Se neces-sário, complete o nível. O óleo emexcesso deverá ser eliminado.O nível na vareta de medição devese encontrar entre as marcas min.e máx. Verifique novamente o ní-vel de óleo depois de um breveperíodo de utilização.

6.1.6 ARMAZENAMENTOSe o reversor for armazenado duranteum longo período durante o inverno,por exemplo, ele deverá ser preenchi-do completamente com óleo ATF atra-vés do orifício do alojamento da varetade medição a fim de proteger o con-junto contra a corrosão.

ATENÇÃOTroque o óleo quando o reversor forcolocado novamente em funciona-mento.

Page 51: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

51

Manual de Operação ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

8.1 Dados técnicos

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 5 M 2.045 1.864 0.0066 0.0088 18 25 20 27 20 27 5000 8.5 19 SAE 6, B/W

2.722 2.150 0.0047 0.0063 13 18 14 19 17 23 5000 Max input power 20 kW

Technical Data for Pleasure Craft DutyBased on engine power B to DIN 6270; shock factorK = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MA 1.875 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13.5 30 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 39 53 47 63 50 67 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 2.136 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 M 1.556 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

1.875 1.955 Max input power 55 kW.Ratio 1.556 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 12 M 2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 37 49 39 53 47 63 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 31 42 33 45 40 54 5000 Max input power 55 kW

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 95 Nm (70 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 10 M 1.482 1.864 0.0109 0.0146 30 41 33 44 38 51 5000 10.3 23 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W

1.792 1.864 Max input power 38 kW.2.045 1.864 0.0095 0.0128 27 36 29 38 34 46 5000 Ratio 1.482 «B» Pos.2.722 2.150 0.0068 0.0091 19 26 20 27 25 33 5000 max torque 95 Nm. Ratio

1.792 «B» Pos. maxtorque 95 Nm.

Page 52: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Manual de Operação ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

52

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

* Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».** Max 45 kW for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MIV 2.134 2.224 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 21 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.718 2.224 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.995 2.224 Ratio 2.134 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder - K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders - K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 230 Nm (170 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 M 1.880 2.095 0.0262 0.0351 79 105 80 107 80 107 5000 18.5 41 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.273 2.095 0.0216 0.0289 65 87 78 104 80 107 5000 Max input power 80 kW.2.737 2.722 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Ratio 1.880 «B» Pos.

max torque 230 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 185 Nm (137 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 30 M 2.148 2.636 0.0241 0.0323 72 97 87 116 92 123 5000 23 51 4 & 5 Yanmar JH

2.696 2.636 Max input power 95 kW.Ratio 2.148 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.Ratio 2.696 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 169 Nm (125 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 MA 2.227 2.737 0.0215 0.0288 64 86 77 104 80 107 5000 21.1 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.737 2.737 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Max input power 80 kW.8 degrees Ratio 2.227 «B» Pos.

max torque 169 Nm.

Page 53: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

53

Manual de Operação ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

9.1 Garantia

9.1.1 CONDIÇÕES DAGARANTIA

ZF HURTH MARINE garante seuReversor Marítimo tipo ZFM contraqualquer defeito do material e/ou demão-de-obra sob condições normaisde uso e manutenção, sendo que estagarantia somente será aplicável se, esomente se, o equipamento tiver sidoinstalado e utilizado corretamente.As obrigações de ZF HURTH MARINEcom esta garantia se limitarão à subs-tituição ou à reparação, a seu critério,de qualquer peça ou peçasreconhecida(s) como defeituosas porZF HURTH MARINE, depois de tê-lasexaminado, com a condição de que apeça ou as peças sejam entregues aodistribuidor oficial ZF HURTH MARINEmais próximo, com frete pago anteci-padamente, dentro do seguinte perío-do:Vinte e quatro (24) meses a partir dadata de comissionamento ou trinta eseis (36) meses desde a data de en-trega ao fabricante de motores, o queocorrer primeiro.As obrigações de ZF HURTH MARINEquanto à presente garantia, tal e comoestá expressa, estão, além disso, con-dicionadas ao cumprimento dos Pro-cedimentos de Garantia que integramesta garantia por parte do distribuidorou fabricante de motores que adquiriuo produto.Todas as reivindicações de garantiadeverão ser encaminhadas ao distri-buidor ou fabricante de motores queadquiriu o Reversor Marítimo tipo ZFM.Esta garantia não será aplicável a qual-quer peça ou peças que tenham sidoreparadas ou modificadas sem o con-sentimento prévio por escrito de umconcessionário oficial ZF HURTHMARINE.Esta garantia não será válida se o pro-duto ou algum de seus componentesou peças tiverem sido submetidos àutilização incorreta, uso abusivo, ne-gligência, modificações ou acidente, ouse as instruções escritas de ZFHURTH MARINE não tiverem sido se-guidas, ou se o equipamento tiver fun-cionado em condições mais severasou que excedam àquelasespecificadas adiante para o mencio-

nado produto, ou que tenha sido insta-lado ou reinstalado incorretamente, outenha recebido manutenção inadequa-da ou ter sido operado de modoincorreto.Esta garantia substitui qualquer outragarantia explícita ou implícita incluin-do a garantia de comercialização e debom uso e outras eventuais obrigaçõesque compreendam danos indiretosderivados da operação do produto.ZF HURTH MARINE não se respon-sabilizará nem autorizará que outraspessoas assumam em seu nome qual-quer outra responsabilidade relaciona-da à venda do REVERSOR MARÍTI-MO ZFM. ZF HURTH MARINE emnenhum caso será responsável pordanos que superem o preço de com-pra do REVERSOR MARÍTIMO ZFM.

Page 54: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Gebruik en onderhoud ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

54

NEDERLANDSHoofdstuk 1.1 Inleiding .................................... 54 2.1 Gegevens van de

omkeerinrichting ........................54 3.1 Beschrijving .............................. 54 4.1 Installatie .................................. 54 5.1 Bediening .................................. 55 6.1 Onderhoud................................ 56 7.1 Storingen .................................. 57 8.1 Technische gegevens .............. 58 9.1 Garantie .................................... 6010.1 Lijst van aanbevolen

vloeistoffen ............................... 8211.1 Installatietekeningen ................ 8312.1 Dealerlijst .................................. 8413.1 Warranty Card .......................... 93

1.1 Inleiding

1.1.1 VERANTWOORDE-LIJKHEDEN VAN DEKLANT

De klant/gebruiker is verantwoordelijkvoor het uitvoeren van de noodzake-lijke veiligheidscontroles om te verze-keren dat smering, koeling, onderhouden aanbevolen procedures strikt wor-den uitgevoerd om veilig en probleem-loos gebruik te waarborgen.Voor alle keerkoppelingen geldt eenbeperkte garantie. Daarom: dienen metbetrekking tot het omgaan met de keer-koppelingen de instructies uit dezehandleiding strikt te worden opgevolgd.

LET OP!De fabrikant is niet aansprakelijkvoor eventuele schade of verliezenveroorzaakt door onjuiste installa-tie, verkeerde bediening van de ap-paratuur en/of gebrekkig onder-houd. De klant dient te verzekerendat het optreden van eventuele ex-terne krachten, alsmede van trillin-gen veroorzaakt door torsie en bui-ging, wordt voorkomen. De interac-tie tussen motor, as en schroef kanleiden tot torsietrillingen die eenhamerend geluid veroorzaken en demotor en/of de keerkoppeling kun-nen beschadigen. De leverancier isniet aansprakelijk voor dergelijketorsietrillingen, die inherent zijn aande installatie.

Deze handleiding omvat onder anderede volgende drie hoofdstukken:

1.1.2 BESCHRIJVINGIn dit gedeelte wordt een korte beschrij-ving gegeven van werking, bedieningen ontwerp van de ZFM.

1.1.3 BEDIENINGIn dit gedeelte worden de bedienings-procedures en alle benodigde veilig-heidsmaatregelen beschreven.

1.1.4 ONDERHOUDIn dit gedeelte worden alle onderhouds-en servicewerkzaamheden beschre-ven die moeten worden uitgevoerddoor de gebruiker. Wanneer in dezehandleiding de termen “rechts, links,stuurboord, bakboord” worden ge-bruikt, hebben deze altijd betrekking opde geïnstalleerde keerkoppeling invoorwaartse bewegingsrichting. Opbelangrijke informatie m.b.t. technischebetrouwbaarheid en bedrijfsveiligheidwordt de aandacht gevestigd door devolgende woorden:

WAARSCHUWINGAls deze procedure, voorwaarde,aanwijzing etc. niet strikt in achtwordt genomen, kan dit resulterenin persoonlijk letsel of overlijden.

LET OP!Als deze procedure, voorwaarde,aanwijzing etc. niet strikt in achtwordt genomen, kan dit resulterenin beschadiging of vernieling vanapparatuur.

OPMERKING: Heeft betrekking optechnische eisen waaraan de gebrui-ker van de apparatuur speciale aan-dacht moet schenken.

De woorden WAARSCHUWING, LETOP! en OPMERKING staan altijd voorde tekst waarop zij betrekking hebben.

2.1 Gegevens van deomkeerinrichting

Het identificatieplaatje is op de omkeer-inrichting aangebracht.In Fig. 1 is een voorbeeld van eenidentificatieplaatje afgebeeld:

A Serienummer van de omkeer-inrichting.

B Code van de overbrenging.C Overbrengingsverhouding voor

schoep die in dezelfde richting alsde motor draait.

D Overbrengingsverhouding voorschoep die in tegengestelde rich-ting van de motor draait.

E Ieder jaar wordt er een andere op-eenvolgende letter toegekend.

F ype omkeerinrichting.Betekenis van de aanduidingen van deomkeerinrichtingen:G ype omkeerinrichting.H Grootte van de omkeerinrichtingI Versie van de omkeerinrichting

3.1 BeschrijvingZF M-keerkoppelingen zijn automa-tisch geregelde schroefwieloverbren-gingen.Ze zijn stevig van constructie en uiterstbetrouwbaar.Desondanks is het essentieel dat degebruiker de volgende instructies m.b.t.installatie, bediening en onderhoud inacht neemt. Wanneer dit wordt nage-laten of wanneer ongeoorloofde aan-passingen aande keerkoppeling plaatsvinden, komthierdoor elke aanspraak op garantie tevervallen. Bij de fabrikant is eenonderhoudshandleiding verkrijgbaar.

Fig. 2: 1) Warmtewisselaar 2) Uitgangsflens 3) Identificatieplaat 4) Activeringshendel 5) Beugel afstandsbediening 6) Schijf 7) Ingangsas 8) Oliepeilstok

4.1 InstallatieBij montage van de ZFM keerkoppelingdient speciale aandacht te worden ge-schonken aan de volgende punten:• Installeer een geschikte dempende

koppeling tussen de motor en dekeerkoppeling.

• SCHUINE STAND: (Fig. 3):De positie van de transmissie mag,ten opzichte van de ingangsas, nietmeer dan 20° zijn (15° voor ZF MIV),in continu bedrijf.De toegestane zijwaartse schuins-

Page 55: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

55

Gebruik en onderhoud ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

tand kan bij de fabrikant worden op-gevraagd.

• KOPPELINGEN: Torsie-elastischekoppeling met min 0.5 mm radialespeling vereist aan motorzijde; flexi-bele elastische koppeling aanbevo-len aan schroefzijde.

• VERBINDING MOTOR-KEER-KOPPELING (Fig. 4):1) Motorflens2) Vliegwiel.3) Elastische koppeling.4) As van de keerkoppeling.5) Flens keerkoppeling.6) Flens vliegwiel.Maximaal toegestane radiale enaxiale waarden X: B-0,1 mm.

• VERBINDING KEERKOPPELING-SCHROEFAS (Fig. 5 - 6):

• Kies een geschikte koeler.Voor gedetailleerde informatie wordtverwezen naar de instal latie-handleiding.Vloeistoftype: ATF (automatischetransmissievloeistof); zie hoofdstuk 10.1.

5.1 BedieningAlle keerkoppelingen hebben vóór ver-zending proefgedraaid.Tijdens normaal bedrijf mag de keer-koppeling alleen worden bediend wan-neer de motor stationair draait.In noodgevallen is het tevens toege-staan bij hogere toerentallen te scha-kelen.De goede werking van het hydraulischecircuit wordt alleen gegarandeerd alsde hydraulische vloeistof regelmatigvervangen wordt, zoals voorgeschre-ven in het onderhoudsprogramma. (Ziehoofdstuk 6.1).Van tijd tot tijd dienen visuele contro-les op lekkage te worden uitgevoerd.

WAARSCHUWINGWerkzaamheden aan de keer-koppeling mogen alleen worden uit-gevoerd als motor en schroef stilstaan.

LET OP!Voordat voor het eerst wordt gestartmoet de keerkoppeling met trans-missievloeistof worden gevuld.Voor vulprocedure, vloeistoftype, -hoeveelheid en -peil wordt verwezennaar hoofdstuk 6.1.4 en vloeistofverversen.

LET OP!Wanneer de keerkoppeling met eente laag oliepeil wordt gebruikt, zaldit de tandwielen beschadigen.Een te hoog oliepeil kan lekkage bijde asafdichtingen en de ontluchtervan de keerkoppeling veroorzakenen de bedrijfstemperatuur aanzien-lijk verhogen.

5.1.1 BEDIENINGSPROCEDURE

LET OP!Voordat de keerkoppeling wordtgebruikt, moet het vloeistofpeil wor-den gecontroleerd (zie hoofdstuk6.1.1).

LET OP!Tijdens normaal bedrijf mag de keer-koppeling alleen worden bediendwanneer de motor stationair draait.Schakelen bij een hoger motor-toerental kan leiden tot over-belasting van de koppelingsplatenen dient tijdens normaal bedrijf teworden voorkomen.

Opmerking: In geval van nood kan dekeerkoppeling van vooruit naar achter-uit worden geschakeld, ook bij eenhoog motortoerental.

SCHAKELSTANDEN (FIGUUR 7):A = Draairichting schroef tegengesteld

aan draairichting motorN = Neutrale standB = Draairichting schroef gelijk aan

draairichting motor

WAARSCHUWINGStart de motor met de keerkoppelingalleen in de neutrale stand.

De normale bedrijfstemperatuur van detransmissieolie dient te liggen in hetbereik van 50°C tot 80°C.De max. toegestane ATF-temperatuurvan 100°C mag alleen gedurende kortetijd worden bereikt.

LET OP!Als de vloeistoftemperatuur te hoogis onmiddellijk de motor stilzetten,

het peil van de transmissievloeistofinspecteren en controleren of hetwater door de oliekoeler goedstroomt.De motor mag pas weer worden ge-start als de storing is verholpen.

5.1.2 ZEILEN, SLEEP OFVOOR ANKER

Als de motor uit is en de boot met hetzeil vaart, zowel als hij aangesleeptwordt of voor anker ligt, kan de schroefdraaien door het effect van de stro-ming. Dit is niet gevaarlijk voor de keer-koppeling.Bij een boot met twee motoren kan deschroef van de niet-ingeschakeldekeerkoppeling probleemloos stationairdraaien. Wanneer de motor is uitge-schakeld, maakt het niet uit in welkestand de schakelhendel staat.

LET OP!Stationaire stand van de schroef: deversnellingshendel moet in de ‘N’(Fig.7)-stand staan. Gebruik deschakelstand tegenovergesteld aande bewegingsrichting om deschroefas vast te zetten, anderswordt de keerkoppeling beschadigd.

WAARSCHUWINGWerk niet aan een keerkoppelingwanneer u wordt gesleept of vooranker gaat in een rivier. De schroefkan dan namelijk gaan draaien.

WAARSCHUWINGWerk niet aan een keerkoppeling ineen varende tweemotorige bootwanneer één van de motoren draait.De schroefas van de niet-werkendetransmissie zal vrij kunnen draaien.

WAARSCHUWINGWanneer de motor stationair draait,maar de schroefas niet moet wor-den aangedreven (bijv. wanneer deaccu met de dynamo wordt opgela-den), moet de schakelhendel (figuur7) in de neutrale stand (N) wordengehouden om te voorkomen dat deboot beweegt. Laat de hydraulischekeerkoppeling niet langdurig methoog toerental in de vrijloop (N)draaien.

Page 56: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Gebruik en onderhoud ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

56

5.1.3 BEDIENINGSSYSTEEM

LET OP!Controleer of de bedieningsstang of–kabel soepel beweegt.

SCHAKELWEG:Mod: ZF 5 M - 10 M- 12 M - 15 M - 15 MA

- 15 MIV - 25 M - 25 MA - 30 M.De minimale schakelweg (N-A=N-B)moet 35 mm zijn voor het buitenstescharnierpunt en 30 mm voor het bin-nenste scharnierpunt.

Fig. 8:1) Bevestigingsschroef hendel

aanhaalmoment 22 ± 1 Nm.2) Minimale schakelweg voor de

bedieningskabel3) Demonteer het bedieningsdeksel niet.4) Olieaftapdop.

Aanhaalmoment: Ma = 22 Nm (16lb-ft).

SCHAKELWEG:Mod: ZF 4-1 MDe schakelweg (N-A=N-B) moet38,5±1,5 mm zijn voor het buitenstescharnierpunt en 33,5±1,5 mm voor hetbinnenste scharnierpunt (vanuit neu-trale stand).Wanneer de hendel een hoek van meerdan 10°-12° maakt, begint deze lood-recht naar buiten te bewegen en stoptdeze wanneer de weg is afgelegd(hoek van 40°).

Fig. 9:1) Bevestigingsschroef hendel

aanhaalmoment 22 ± 1 Nm.2) Demonteer afdichtingsring3) Demonteer het bedieningsdeksel

niet.

HENDELSTAND: In neutrale standloodrecht op bedieningsstang of -ka-bel. De schakelhendel kan met behulpvan een klemschroef in elke standworden vastgezet . Minimumafstandtussen schakelhendel en -deksel is 0.5mm. Wanneer het deksel wordt geo-pend of losgemaakt, moet opnieuwworden afgesteld (mag alleen wordenuitgevoerd door gespecialiseerd perso-neel).

Fig. 10:1) Oliepeilstok en olievuldop (17 mm)

Aanhaalmoment: Ma = 20 Nm (15lb-ft).

2) Afstand bedieningshendel van hetdeksel min 0,5 mm.

CONTROLES: Om een goede werkingte kunnen garanderen moet de positievan de hendel regelmatig gecontro-leerd worden.

6.1 Onderhoud

6.1.1 VLOEISTOFPEIL-CONTROLE

WAARSCHUWINGWerk niet aan de keerkoppelingwanneer u wordt gesleept of vooranker gaat in een rivier. De schroefkan dan namelijk gaan draaien.

BESCHRIJVING OLIESTOK (Fig. 11):1) Oppervlakte behuizing.2) Oliepeilstok.3) Oliepeil.4) ATF olie.5) Afdichtingsring.

Het transmissievloeistofpeil kan inkoude of warme toestand worden ge-controleerd.

N.B.: Controleer altijd het oliepeil alvo-rens de omkeerinrichting in bedrijf testellen door als volgt te werk te gaan.- Draai de vloeistofpeilstok (figuur 11)

los door de greep linksom te draaien.- Veeg de peilstok met een schone en

stofvrije doek af.- Steek de peilstok naar binnen – niet

erin schroeven. Verwijder peilstok encontroleer vloeistofpeil: Het vloeistof-peil moet zich tussen het minimum-en het maximummerkteken bevin-den (3-4figuur 11).

- Steek de peilstok naar binnen endraai deze vast door de greeprechtsom te draaien.

LET OP!Afhankelijk van het type en de plaat-sing van de koeler en de leidingenzal zich een bepaalde hoeveelheidolie verzamelen nadat de motor is

stilgezet en zal deze na een langerestilstandperiode in de keerkoppelingterugstromen.Hierdoor kan het oliepeil in de keer-koppeling boven het max. merkte-ken komen.Verwijder de overtollige olie niet,maar ga volgens te werk.

- Laat de motor stationair draaien (metde schakelhendel in de neutralestand) totdat de oliekoeler en alle lei-dingen met vloeistof zijn gevuld.

- Schakel de motor uit en controleerdirect daarna het vloeistofpeil. Indiennoodzakelijk, olie bijvullen tot hetmerkteken op de peilstok.Het met de peilstok gemetenvloeistofpeil (figuur 11) moet tussenhet min. en het max. merkteken lig-gen. Het vloeistofpeil moet na eenkorte gebruiksperiode opnieuw wor-den gecontroleerd.

6.1.2 VLOEISTOF VERVERSEN

LET OP!De eerste verversing moet wordenuitgevoerd na 25 bedrijfsuren.Hierna dient de olie na elke 300bedrijfsuren of eenmaal per jaar teworden ververst (afhankelijk van determijn die het eerst is verstreken).

LET OP!De oude olie moet als speciaal afvalbeschouwd worden waardoor hetmilieu verontreinigd wordt: de oliemoet dus afgevoerd worden in func-tie van zijn gedifferentieerde struc-tuur.

6.1.3 TRANSMISSIEVLOEISTOFAFTAPPEN

Verwijder de dop (1 Fig. 12) en laat deolie weglopen door de speciale openingin de onderkant van de behuizing.

6.1.4 VULLEN METTRANSMISSIE VLOEISTOF

Vullen met olie voor automatische ver-snellingen ATF volgens de als volgtweergegeven hoeveelheden. Vul dehoeveelheid toe die nodig geacht wordtvoor het vullen van de warmtewissel-aar en de desbetreffende verbindings-slangen

Page 57: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

57

Gebruik en onderhoud ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

7.1 Storingen

Controleer allereerst of de instructies van de vorige punten opgevolgd zijn.

AFWIJKING MOGELIJKE OORZAAK OPLOSSING1. Hoge olietemperatuur - Te hoog olieniveau - overtollige olie verwijderen

- Te laag olieniveau - bijvullen

- Warmtewisselaar verstopt - warmtewisselaar vervangen en

watercircuit nakijken

- Geen water in het circuit - circuit nakijken en lek repareren.

2. Aanwezigheid van olie op - Schroeven los - aandraaien op het juiste aanhaalmoment

de behuizing - Verbindingen los - aandraaien of vervangen

- Oliepeilstok los - aandraaien of vervangen

- Te hoog olieniveau tijdens - aanzuigen tot aan het max. teken

de werking

3. Moeilijke inschakeling - Blokkering verdeler - een servicecentrum raadplegen

- Afstandsbediening - regeling

4. Langzame inschakeling - Blokkering verdeler - een servicecentrum raadplegen

- Afstandsbediening - regeling

5. De boot beweegt niet - Blokkering verdeler - een servicecentrum raadplegen

- Verkeerde positie van de bedieningshendel - regeling

- Laag olieniveau - bijvullen

- Schroef verloren - opnieuw installeren

- Schroefas kapot - een servicecentrum raadplegen

- Transmissie werkt niet goed - een servicecentrum raadplegen

- Motor werkt niet goed - een servicecentrum raadplegen

ZF 4-1 M: .......................... 0,30 literZF 5 M: ............................. 0,30 literZF 10 M: ........................... 0,35 literZF 12 M: ........................... 0,55 literZF 15 M: ........................... 0,55 literZF 15 MA: ......................... 0,50 literZF 15 MIV: ........................ 1,00 literZF 25 M: ........................... 0,75 literZF 25 MA: ......................... 0,75 literZF 30 M: .. min. 0,90 - max. 1,10 liter• Geldig voor inclinatie van de onderste

as op 20 graden (15° voor ZF MIV).Gebruik alleen olie voor automatischeversnellingen volgens de specificatiesvermeld in de «Lijst met aanbevolenoliesoorten» op pag.82.

6.1.5 PROEFDRAAIEN1) Laat de keerkoppeling na het ver-

versen van de olie proefdraaien.2) Zet de schakelhendel in de neutrale

stand (N).Start de motor en laat deze kort sta-tionair draaien om de koeler en deleidingen met transmissieolie tevullen.

3) Stop de motor en controleer hetoliepeil opnieuw. Vul zonodig olie bij.Overtollige olie moet worden verwij-derd. Het met de peilstok gemetenoliepeil moet tussen het min. en hetmax. merkteken liggen.Het oliepeil moet na een korte

gebruiksperiode opnieuw wordengecontroleerd.

6.1.6 OPSLAGAls de keerkoppeling gedurende lan-gere tijd wordt opgeslagen (bijv. in dewinter), dient deze via het peilstokgatvolledig te worden gevuld met ATF omcorrosie te voorkomen.

LET OP!Ververs de olie wanneer de keer-koppeling weer in gebruik wordtgenomen, overeenkomstig eerdervermelde instructie.

Page 58: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Gebruik en onderhoud ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

58

8.1 Technische gegevens

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 5 M 2.045 1.864 0.0066 0.0088 18 25 20 27 20 27 5000 8.5 19 SAE 6, B/W

2.722 2.150 0.0047 0.0063 13 18 14 19 17 23 5000 Max input power 20 kW

Technical Data for Pleasure Craft DutyBased on engine power B to DIN 6270; shock factorK = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MA 1.875 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13.5 30 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 39 53 47 63 50 67 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 2.136 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 M 1.556 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

1.875 1.955 Max input power 55 kW.Ratio 1.556 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 12 M 2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 37 49 39 53 47 63 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 31 42 33 45 40 54 5000 Max input power 55 kW

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 95 Nm (70 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 10 M 1.482 1.864 0.0109 0.0146 30 41 33 44 38 51 5000 10.3 23 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W

1.792 1.864 Max input power 38 kW.2.045 1.864 0.0095 0.0128 27 36 29 38 34 46 5000 Ratio 1.482 «B» Pos.2.722 2.150 0.0068 0.0091 19 26 20 27 25 33 5000 max torque 95 Nm. Ratio

1.792 «B» Pos. maxtorque 95 Nm.

Page 59: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

59

Gebruik en onderhoud ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

* Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».** Max 45 kW for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MIV 2.134 2.224 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 21 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.718 2.224 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.995 2.224 Ratio 2.134 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder - K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders - K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 230 Nm (170 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 M 1.880 2.095 0.0262 0.0351 79 105 80 107 80 107 5000 18.5 41 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.273 2.095 0.0216 0.0289 65 87 78 104 80 107 5000 Max input power 80 kW.2.737 2.722 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Ratio 1.880 «B» Pos.

max torque 230 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 185 Nm (137 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 30 M 2.148 2.636 0.0241 0.0323 72 97 87 116 92 123 5000 23 51 4 & 5 Yanmar JH

2.696 2.636 Max input power 95 kW.Ratio 2.148 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.Ratio 2.696 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 169 Nm (125 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 MA 2.227 2.737 0.0215 0.0288 64 86 77 104 80 107 5000 21.1 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.737 2.737 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Max input power 80 kW.8 degrees Ratio 2.227 «B» Pos.

max torque 169 Nm.

Page 60: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Gebruik en onderhoud ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

60

9.1 Garantie

9.1.1 STANDAARDGARANTIEZF HURTH MARINE garandeert dathaar ZFM-keerkoppeling vrij is vanmateriaaldefecten en constructiefoutenbijunder normaal gebruik en onder-houd, met dien verstande dat dezegarantie alleen geldt als de apparatuurop de juiste wijze is geïnstalleerd engebruikt.De verplichting van ZF HURTH MA-RINE is bij deze garantie beperkt totvervanging of reparatie, naar eigenkeuze, van onderdelen die bij onder-zoek door ZF HURTH MARINE defectzijn gebleken, mits deze onderdelenaan de dichtstbijzijnde officiële ZFHURTH MARINE-dealer franco wor-den geretourneerd, en wel binnen devolgende periode:twaalf (12) maanden vanaf de datumvan inbedrijfstelling of achttien (18)maanden vanaf de datum van afleve-ring bij de motorfabrikant (de eerst ver-lopen termijn geldt).De hier beschreven garantie-verplichtingen van ZF HURTH MA-RINE gelden onder voorbehoud dat dedealer of motorfabrikant die het productheeft geleverd, de garantieproceduresheeft uitgevoerd die deel uitmaken vandeze garantie.Garantieclaims dienen te worden inge-diend bij de dealer of motorfabrikantdie de ZF-keerkoppeling heeft gele-verd.Deze garantie geldt niet voor onderde-len die zonder voorafgaande schrifte-lijke toestemming van een officiële ZFHURTH MARINE-dealer zijn gerepa-reerd of aangepast.Deze garantie geldt niet als het productof componenten of onderdelen daar-van verkeerd zijn gebruikt, verwaar-loosd, aangepast of bij een ongeval zijnbetrokken, of niet zijn gebruikt overeen-komstig de gedrukte instructies van ZFHURTH MARINE of zijn gebruikt on-der omstandigheden die zwaarder wa-ren dan, of op andere wijze te bovengingen aan, de omstandigheden om-schreven in de specificaties voor hetgenoemde product, of onjuist (op-nieuw) zijn geïnstalleerd of onjuist zijnonderhouden en gebruikt. Deze garan-tie geldt uitdrukkelijk in plaats van alleandere expliciete of impliciete garan-

ties inclusief de garanties vanverkoopbaarheid en deugdelijkheid envan alle andere verplichtingen,inclusief(maar niet beperkt tot), gevolgschadeen ZF HURTH MARINE aanvaardtgeen enkele andere aansprakelijkheidin verband met de verkoop van de keer-koppeling en geeft geen enkele anderepersoon toestemming deze aanspra-kelijkheid voor ZF HURTH MARINE opzich te nemen. ZF HURTH MARINE isin geen enkel geval aansprakelijk vooreen schending van de garantie-bepalingen voor een bedrag dat deaankooppri js van de ZFM-keer-koppeling te boven gaat.

Page 61: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

61

Käyttö ja Huolto ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

SUOMISisällysluettelo 1.1 Johdanto ................................... 61 2.1 Vaihteiston tyyppi ..................... 61 3.1 Yleisiä tietoja ............................ 61 4.1 Asennus .................................... 61 5.1 Käyttö ........................................ 62 6.1 Huolto ....................................... 63 7.1 Vianetsintä ................................ 64 8.1 Tekniset tiedot .......................... 65 9.1 Takuu ........................................ 6710.1 Lista suositelluista öljyistä ....... 8211.1 Edustajaluettelo ....................... 8312.1 Asennuspiirustukset ................ 8413.1 Warranty Card .......................... 93

1.1 JOHDANTO

1.1.1 ASIAKKAAN VASTUUAsiakas / käyttäjä on vastuussa välttä-mättömistä tarkastuksista sen varmis-tamiseksi, että voitelu, jäähdytys, huol-to ja kaikki käyttö- ja huolto ohjeidenmukaiset toimenpiteet tulevat suorite-tuksi laitteen turvallisen ja varman käy-tön takaamiseksi.Jokaisella ZF:n vaihteistolla on takuu,jonka voimassaolo edellyttää, että näitäkäyttöohjeita noudatetaan huolellisesti.

VAROITUSValmistaja ei ole vastuussa vahin-goista jotka johtuvat asennusvir-heestä, laitteen väärästä käytöstä ja/tai sen huollon puutteesta.Asiakkaan tulee varmistaa, ettävaihteistoon ei kohdistu ulkoisiavoimia kuten vääntöä tai taivutustajotka voivat aiheuttaa värähtelyä.Moottorin, akselin ja potkurin väli-nen vuorovaikutus voi saada aikaanvääntövärähtelyä joka puolestaanaiheuttaa hammaspyörien hakkaa-vaa ääntä ja saattaa vahingoittaamoottoria ja/tai vaihteistoa.Valmistaja ei ole vastuussa tällaises-ta asennuksesta johtuvasta vääntö-värähtelystä.

Tämä ohjekirja sisältää muiden luku-jen lisäksi kolme seuraavaa päälukua:

1.1.2 YLEISIÄ TIETOJATämä luku kuvaa lyhyesti ZF Mvaihteistotyyppien toimintaa, käyttöä jarakennetta

1.1.3 KÄYTTÖTämä luku sisältää käyttöohjeet ja kaik-ki välttämättömät turvallisuusohjeet.

1.1.4 HUOLTOTämä luku sisältää kaikki huolto-toimenpiteet jotka käyttäjän on suori-tettava.Tämän ohjekirjan termeillä “vasen, oi-kea, tyyrpuuri, paapuuri” viitataan ainaeteenpäinmenosuuntaan katsottunavaihteistoon nähden.Tekniseen luotettavuuteen ja käyttö-turvallisuuteen liittyvää tietoa on koros-tettu käyttäen seuraavia ilmauksia:

VAROITUSMikä tahansa menettely, toiminta,tila, huomautus jne, jonka huomioi-matta jättäminen voi johtaa louk-kaantumiseen tai kuolemantapauk-seen.

HUOMIOMikä tahansa menettely, toiminta,tila, huomautus jne, jonka huomioi-matta jättäminen voi johtaa laitteenvaurioitumiseen tai tuhoutumiseen.

HUOMAUTUS: Viittaa tekniseen seik-kaan joka käyttäjän tulee erityisestihuomioida

Sanat VAROITUS, HUOMIO ja HUO-MAUTUS on sijoitettu aina tekstin al-kuun välttämättömät turvallisuus-ohjeet.

2.1 Vaihteiston tyyppiTunnistuskilpi on kiinnitetty suunnan-vaihtimeen.Kuvassa 1 on esimerkki tunnistus-kilvestä:A Vaihteiston sarjanumero.B Vaihteiston varaosanumeroC Välityssuhde, kun potkurin pyörimis-

suunta on sama kuin moottorin.

D Välityssuhde, kun potkurin pyöri-missuunta on vastakkainen moot-torin pyörimissuuntaan verrattuna.

E Vuosittain vaihtuva kirjain.F Vaihteiston tyyppiVaihteiston nimen selitys:G Vaihteiston tyyppiH Vaihteiston kokoI Vaihteiston versio

3.1 Yleisiä tietojaZF M - merivaihteistot ovat mekaani-sesti ohjattuja vinohammasvaihteisto-ja. Ne ovat vahvarakenteisia ja luotet-tavia. Asennus on suoritettava ohjeidenmukaisesti ja käytössä on noudatetta-va käyttö- ja huolto-ohjeita.Ohjeiden noudattamatta jättäminen tailuvattomien muutosten tekeminenvaihteistoon aiheuttavat takuun raukea-misen.Huoltokäsikirja on saatavilla valmista-jalta

Kuva 2: 1) Jäähdyttäjä 2) Ulostulolaippa 3) Tunnistuskilpi 4) Vaihteensiirtovipu. 5) Kaukohallintalaitteen teline 6) Kytkinlevy 7) Sisäänmenoakseli 8) Öljyn mittatikku

4.1 AsennusAsennettaessa ZFM vaihteistoa seu-raavat seikat tulisi ottaa huomioon:• Asennus pitäisi suorittaa vain ammat-

tihenkilöiden toimesta.• KALLISTUS (kuva 3):

Vaihteiston ei tule olla yli 20° (15° ZFMIV) kulmassa sisäänmenoakseliinnähden jatkuvassa käytössä.Suurin mahdollinen sivukallistuskul-ma kysyttävissä valmistajalta.

• ELASTISET KYTKIMET: Moottorinja vaihteiston väliin asennettava jous-tava vetolevy jossa vähintään 0,5mm:n säteisvälys. Potkurin puolellesuositellaan myös joustavaa kytkin-tä.

Page 62: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Käyttö ja Huolto ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

62

• MOOTTORIN JA VAIHTEISTONLIITÄNTÄ (kuva 4):1) Moottorin laippa2) Vauhtipyörä3) Elastinen kytkin4) Käyttöakseli5) Vaihteiston laippa6) Vauhtipyörän koteloMaksimi radiaalinen ja aksiaalinenpoikkeamaX: K- 0,1 mm

• VAIHTEISTON JA POTKURI-AKSELIN LIITÄNTÄ (kuva 5 - 6):

• Valitse sopiva jäähdyttäjäLisätietoja on saatavilla asennuskäsi-kirjasta.Öljyn tyyppi: ATF (Automatic Trans-mission Fluid) Automaattivaihteistollesopiva öljy. Katso luku 10.1.

5.1 KäyttöKaikki ZF vaihteistot on koekäytettyennen toimitusta. Normaalissa käytös-sä suunnan vaihto on sallittua vainmoottorin tyhjäkäynnillä.Hätätapauksissa se on kuitenkin sal-littua myös suuremmilla kierrosluvuilla.Kiertojärjestelmä toimii asianmukai-sesti vain, jos vaihteistoöljy vaihdetaansäännöllisesti määräaikaishuollon yh-teydessä. Katso luku 6.1.Ajoittain on tarkistettava ettei öljyvuotoaesiinny.

VAROITUSToimenpiteet vaihteistolle ovat sal-littuja vain kun moottori ei ole käyn-nissä ja potkuri ei pyöri.

HUOMIOVaihteisto on täytettävä vaihteisto-öljyllä ennen käyttöönottoa. Oheettäyttömenettelylle, öljytyypille ja senmäärälle löytyvät luvuista 6.1.4.

HUOMIOVaihteiston käyttö ilman tarpeellis-ta öljymäärää vaurioittaa hammas-pyöriä. Liiallinen öljymäärä voi aihe-uttaa öljyn vuotoa tiivisteistä jahuohottimesta ja saattaa nostaahuomattavasti käyttölämpötilaa.

5.1.1 KÄYTTÖ

HUOMIOEnnen vaihteiston käyttöä tarkistaöljyn määrä (katso luku 6.1.1).

HUOMIONormaalissa käytössä suunnanvaihtaminen on sallittua vain moot-torin ollessa tyhjäkäynnillä. Suun-nan vaihtaminen korkeammilla kier-roksilla voi johtaa kytkinlevyjenylikuormitukseen ja sitä pitäisi vält-tää normaaliolosuhteissa.

HUOMAUTUS: Suunnan vaihtamineneteenpäinajosta taaksepäinajoon onmahdollista hätätapauksissa myöskorkeammilla kierrosluvuilla.

KÄYTTÖASENNOT (kuva 7):A = Potkurin pyörimissuunta vastak-

kainen moottorin pyörimissuun-taan nähden

N = Vapaa-asentoB = Potkurin pyörimissuunta sama

kuin moottorin

VAROITUSKäynnistä moottori vain vaihteenollessa vapaalla.

Käyttölämpötila olisi pidettävä 50-80°C:ssa. Öljyn maksimilämpötilassa,100 °C, vaihteistoa saa käyttää vainlyhytaikaisesti.

HUOMIOJos öljyn lämpötila on liian korkeasammuta moottori välittömästi jatarkista öljyn määrä sekä jäähdyttä-jän toiminta.Älä käynnistä moottoria uudelleenennen kuin vika on korjattu.

5.1.2 PURJEHDUS, HINAUSTAI ANKKUROINTI

Kun moottori on pysähdyksissä ja aluk-sella purjehditaan, sitä hinataan tai seon ankkuroituna, potkuri saattaa pyö-riä virtauksen vaikutuksesta.

Tämä ei aiheuta vaaraa vaihteistolle.Aluksessa jossa on kaksi moottoria, eikäytössä olevan vaihteiston potkurisaattaa pyöriä vapaasti.Kun moottori on pysähdyksissävaihteensiirtovivun asennolla ei olemerkitystä.

HUOMIOPotkurin vapaa-asento: vaihteensiir-tovivun on oltava asennossa N(kuva 7). Jos potkurin pyöriminenhalutaan estää on vivun asennonoltava päinvastainen kuin eteenpäinajettaessa, muutoin vaihteisto voivaurioitua

VAROITUSToimenpiteet vaihteistolle eivät olesallittuja aluksen ollessa hinaukses-sa tai jokeen ankkuroituna koskatällöin potkuri saattaa pyöriä.

VAROITUSToimenpiteet vaihteistolle aluksessa,jossa on kaksi moottoria eivät olesallittuja kun toinen moottoreista onkäynnissä. Pysähdyksissä olevanmoottorin potkuri saattaa pyöriä.

VAROITUSJos halutaan potkurin pysyvän pai-koillaan moottorin minimikierrosno-peudella (esim. ladattaessa akkuageneraattorilla), vaihteensiirtovivunon oltava vapaa-asennossa (N) jot-ta alus ei liiku (kuva 12). Vältä hyd-raulisen vaihteiston pitkäaikaistakäyttämistä vapaa-asennossa kor-keilla moottorin kierrosnopeuksilla.

5.1.3 VAIHTEISTON KÄYTTÖ

HUOMIOVarmista että työntövetokaapelinliikkeelle ei ole esteitä

VAIHTEENSIIRTOVIVUN LIIKEMATKAMod: ZF 5 M - 10 M- 12 M - 15 M - 15 MA

- 15 MIV - 25 M - 25 MA - 30 M.

Page 63: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

63

Käyttö ja Huolto ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

Vaihteensiirtovivun minimiliikematka (N-A=N-B) ulommalle kiinnitysreiälle täytyyolla vähintään 35 mm ja sisemmällekiinnitysreiälle vähintään 30 mm.

kuva 8:1) Kiristysmomentti 22 ± 1 Nm.2) Kaapelin minimi liikematka3) Alä avaa kantta4) Öljyntyhjennystulppa

Kiristysmomentti: Ma = 22 Nm (16lb-ft).

VAIHTEENSIIRTOVIVUN LIIKEMATKA:Mod: ZF 4-1 MVaihteensiirtovivun minimiliikematka(N-A=N-B) ulommalle kiinnitysreiälletäytyy olla 38,5 ± 1,5 mm ja sisemmällekiinnitysreiälle 33,5 ± 1,5 mm neutraa-lista asennosta. Kun vivun liike saa-vuttaa 10-12 asteen kulman liikkuu sesen lisäksi maksimissaan 40 asteenkulmaan.

kuva 9:1) Kiristysmomentti 22 ± 1 Nm.2) Älä avaa mutteria3) Alä avaa kantta

VAIHTEENSIIRTOVIVUN ASENTO:neutraaliasennossa kohtisuorassatyöntövetokaapeliin nähden.Vaihteensiirtovivun voi asentaa halut-tuun asentoon ja kiristää sen sitten kiin-nitysruuvin avulla. Välys vaihteensiir-tovivun ja sen kannen välillä tulee ollavähintään 0,5 mm. Jos vaihteensiirto-vivun kansi avataan tai sen ruuveja löy-sätään se pitää sen jälkeen säätääuudelleen (vain ammattihenkilöidentoimesta).

kuva 10:1) Öljyn mittatikku ja täyttöaukko (M 17)

Kiristysmomentti : Ma = 20 Nm (15lb-ft).

2) Vaihdevivun välys min 0,5 mm

TARKISTUKSET: Tarkista säännölli-sesti vivun asento, jotta toiminta onasianmukaista.

6.1 Huolto

6.1.1 ÖLJYN MÄÄRÄNTARKISTUS

VAROITUSToimenpiteet eivät ole sallittuja aluk-sen ollessa hinauksessa tai jokeenankkuroituna koska tällöin potkurisaattaa pyöriä.

ÖLJYN MITTATIKUN KUVAUS (kuva 11):1) Kotelon yläpinta2) Mittatikku3) Öljytaso4) ATF-öljy5) Tiivisterengas.

Vaihteiston öljyn määrä voidaan tarkis-taa öljyn ollessa joko kylmää tai läm-mintä.

HUOMAUTUS: Tarkista öljyntaso ainaennen suunnanvaihtimen ensimmäis-tä käyttöönottoa. Toimi seuraavasti.- Irrota mittatikku (kuva 11) kiertämäl-

lä kahvaa vastapäivään.- Pyyhi mittatikku puhtaalla ja

pölyttömällä rievulla.- Aseta mittatikku reikään kiertämättä

sitä kierteille. Nosta se ylös ja tar-kista öljyn määrä: öljyn määrä pitääolla minimi- ja maksimimerkin välillä(3-4 kuva 11).

- Aseta mittatikku takaisin paikalleenja lukitse se kiertämällä myötä-päivään.

HUOMIOMoottorin pysäyttämisen jälkeentietty määrä voiteluöljyä virtaa takai-sin vaihteistoon. Öljyn määrä riip-puu jäähdyttäjän tyypistä jaasennustavasta sekä kierto-järjestelmästä. Pitkän seisonta-ajanjälkeen vaihteiston öljymäärä saat-taa täten ylittää maksimirajan. Öljyäei saa poistaa, vaan on toimittavaseuraavasti.

- Moottoria on käytettävä tyhjäkäynnil-

lä ja suunnanvaihtovivun on oltavavapaa-asennossa kunnes jäähdyttä-jä ja öljyputket ovat täynnä öljyä.

- Pysäytä moottori ja tarkista öljyn mää-rä välittömästi. Jos tarpeellista, vähen-nä öljyn määrää kunnes se on mitta-tikun minimi- ja maksimimerkin välis-sä (kuva 11). Tarkista öljyn määräuudestaan lyhyen käyttöajan jälkeen.

6.1.2 ÖLJYN VAIHTO

HUOMIOEnsimmäinen vaihto tulisi suorittaa25 käyttötunnin jälkeen. Sen jälkeenöljy pitää vaihtaa 300 käyttötunninvälein tai kerran vuodessa (riippu-en siitä mikä tapahtuu ensin).

HUOMIOJäteöljyä tulee käsitellä erikoisjät-teenä, joka saastuttaa ympäristöä:se tulee toimittaa jätteiden lajittelu-keskukseen.

6.1.3 ÖLJYN POISTOPoista tulppa (1 kuva 12) ja valuta öljykotelon alaosassa olevan reiän kautta.

6.1.4 TÄYTTÖ ATF-ÖLJYLLÄTäytä automaattivaihteistoille tarkoite-tulla ATF-öljyllä, noudata annettujamääriä. Lisää tarv ittava määrätäyttääksesi lämmönvaihtimen ja senliitosputket.ZF 4-1 M: ..........................0,30 litraaZF 5 M: .............................0,30 litraaZF 10 M: ...........................0,35 litraaZF 12 M: ...........................0,55 litraaZF 15 M: ...........................0,55 litraaZF 15 MA: .........................0,50 litraaZF 15 MIV: ........................1,00 litraaZF 25 M: ...........................0,75 litraaZF 25 MA: .........................0,75 litraaZF 30 M: min. 0,90 - maks. 1,10 litraa• Akselin kallistuksen ollessa alle 20°

(15° ZF MIV).Käytä ainoastaan automaattivaihteisto-öljyä «Suositeltujen öljyjen luettelon»määrittelyjen mukaan, s 82.

Page 64: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Käyttö ja Huolto ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

64

7.1 Vianetsintä

Tarkista ensin että käyttöohjeita on noudatettu.

VIKA MAHDOLLINEN SYY TOIMENPITEET

1. Öljyn korkea lämpötila - Öljyn taso liian - Vähennä öljymäärää

korkea. maksimimerkkiin asti

- Öljyn taso liian alhainen - Lisää öljyä

- Jäähdytin tukkeutunut - Vaihda tai puhdista jäähdytin

ja tarkista veden kierto

- Ei vettä jäähdytinkierrossa - Tarkista veden kierto ja korjaa

mahdollinen vuotokohta.

2. Öljyä vaihdekotelon päällä - Ruuveja ei riittävästi kiristetty - Kiristä ruuvit oikeaan momenttiin

- Letkuliittimet vuotavat - Kiristä liittimet

- Öljyn mittatikku on irronnut - Kiinnitä mittatikku

- Öljyn taso liian korkea - Vähennä öljymäärää

käytön aikana. maksimimerkkiin asti.

3. Vaihteenvalitsin on liian jäykkä - Viallinen suunnanvaihtomekanismi - Ota yhteys ammattihuoltoon

- Kaukohallintalaitteen väärä säätö - Tarkista ja säädä kaukohallintalaite

4. Vaihde kytkeytyy hitaasti - Viallinen suunnanvaihtomekanismi - Ota yhteys ammattihuoltoon

- Kaukohallintalaitteen väärä säätö - Tarkista ja säädä kaukohallintalaite

5. Alus ei liiku - Viallinen suunnanvaihtomekanismi - Ota yhteys ammattihuoltoon

- Suunnanvaihtovivun väärä asento - Säädä vipu oikeaan asentoon

- Potkuri irronnut - Asenna uusi potkuri

- Potkuriakseli rikkoutunut - Ota yhteys ammattihuoltoon

- Vaihteisto viallinen - Ota yhteys ammattihuoltoon

- Moottori viallinen - Ota yhteys ammattihuoltoon

6.1.5 KOEKÄYTTÖ1) Suorita koekäyttö öljynvaihdon jäl-

keen.2) Aseta suunnanvaihtovipu vapaa-

asentoon (N). Käynnistä moottori jaanna sen tyhjäkäydä hetken jottajäähdyttäjä ja putket täyttyisivätöljyllä.

3) Pysäytä moottori ja tarkista uudel-leen öljyn määrä. Lisää öljyä jos seon tarpeen. Liika öljy pitää poistaa.Öljyn korkeus mittatikussa pitää ollaminimi- ja maksimimerkin välissä.Öljyn määrä täytyy tarkistaa uudel-leen lyhyen käyttöajan jälkeen.

6.1.6 SÄILYTYSJos vaihteisto on varastossa pitemmänaikaa, esim. talvisäilössä se pitää täyt-tää kokonaan ATF- öljyllä ruostumisenestämiseksi.

HUOMIOVaihda öljy ennen käyttöön ottoa.

Page 65: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

65

Käyttö ja Huolto ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

8.1 Teknisettiedot

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 5 M 2.045 1.864 0.0066 0.0088 18 25 20 27 20 27 5000 8.5 19 SAE 6, B/W

2.722 2.150 0.0047 0.0063 13 18 14 19 17 23 5000 Max input power 20 kW

Technical Data for Pleasure Craft DutyBased on engine power B to DIN 6270; shock factorK = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MA 1.875 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13.5 30 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 39 53 47 63 50 67 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 2.136 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 M 1.556 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

1.875 1.955 Max input power 55 kW.Ratio 1.556 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 12 M 2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 37 49 39 53 47 63 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 31 42 33 45 40 54 5000 Max input power 55 kW

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 95 Nm (70 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 10 M 1.482 1.864 0.0109 0.0146 30 41 33 44 38 51 5000 10.3 23 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W

1.792 1.864 Max input power 38 kW.2.045 1.864 0.0095 0.0128 27 36 29 38 34 46 5000 Ratio 1.482 «B» Pos.2.722 2.150 0.0068 0.0091 19 26 20 27 25 33 5000 max torque 95 Nm. Ratio

1.792 «B» Pos. maxtorque 95 Nm.

Page 66: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Käyttö ja Huolto ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

66

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

* Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».** Max 45 kW for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MIV 2.134 2.224 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 21 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.718 2.224 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.995 2.224 Ratio 2.134 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder - K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders - K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 230 Nm (170 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 M 1.880 2.095 0.0262 0.0351 79 105 80 107 80 107 5000 18.5 41 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.273 2.095 0.0216 0.0289 65 87 78 104 80 107 5000 Max input power 80 kW.2.737 2.722 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Ratio 1.880 «B» Pos.

max torque 230 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 185 Nm (137 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 30 M 2.148 2.636 0.0241 0.0323 72 97 87 116 92 123 5000 23 51 4 & 5 Yanmar JH

2.696 2.636 Max input power 95 kW.Ratio 2.148 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.Ratio 2.696 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 169 Nm (125 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 MA 2.227 2.737 0.0215 0.0288 64 86 77 104 80 107 5000 21.1 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.737 2.737 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Max input power 80 kW.8 degrees Ratio 2.227 «B» Pos.

max torque 169 Nm.

Page 67: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

67

Käyttö ja Huolto ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

9.1 Takuu

9.1.1 NORMAALI TAKUUZF HURTH MARINE antaa ZFMmerivaihteistolleen täyden materiaali-ja valmistustakuun ainoastaan silläedellytyksellä että laite on asennettuoikein ja sitä on käytetty asianmukai-sesti.ZF HURTH MARINEn velvollisuus tä-män takuun puitteissa rajoittuu ZFHURTH MARINEn tutkimuksessavialliseksi havaittujen osien vaihtami-seen tai korjaukseen siinä tapaukses-sa että osa tai osat ovat palautettu lä-himmälle ZF HURTH MARINEn edus-tajalle rahti etukäteen maksettuna seu-raavan määräajan kuluessa:24 (kaksikymmentäneljä) kuukauttaveneen käyttöönotosta tai 36 (kolme-kymmentäkuusi) kuukautta toimituk-sesta tehtaalta, riippuen siitä mikä ta-pahtuu ensiksi.ZF HURTH MARINEn takuu-velvollisuudet ovat voimassa sillä edel-lytyksellä että myös tuotteen edustajaja moottorinvalmistaja, joka on ostanutvaihteiston, noudattavat virallista takuu-menettelyä, joka on osa takuuta.Kaikki takuuvaatimukset tulee esittääZF:n edustajal le tai moottorin-valmistajal le joka on ostanut ZFvaihteiston.Takuu ei ole voimassa siinä tapaukses-sa että johonkin laitteen osaan tai senosiin on tehty korjauksia tai muutoksiajoita virallinen ZF-edustaja ei ole kirjal-lisesti valtuuttanut.Tämä takuu ei ole voimassa silloin joslaitetta tai sen osia on käytetty väärintai huolimattomasti, siihen on tehtymuutoksia tai se on vaurioitunut onnet-tomuudessa. Takuu ei ole voimassamyöskään, jos laitteen käytössä ei olenoudatettu ZF:n kirjallisia käyttöohjei-ta tai sitä on käytetty vaikeammissaolosuhteissa kuin ohjeissa on sallittutai ylittämällä jollain tavalla laitteen käy-tölle määritellyt rajat, tai se on asen-nettu väärin tai sitä on käytetty tai huol-lettu epäasianmukaisesti.Nämä takuuehdot korvaavat kaikki

muut suorat ja epäsuorat takuuehdot,jotka sisältävät myynti- ja käyttötakuun,sekä mahdolliset muut velvoitteet jot-ka koskevat käytöstä aiheutuneita vau-rioita.ZF Hurth Marine ei ota vastuuta mis-tään muista mahdoll isista l isä-velvoitteista jotka koskevat ZFMmerivaihteiston myyntiä, eikä olevaltuuttanut ketään ottamaan tällaistavastuuta ZF Hurth Marinen nimissä.ZF Hurth Marine ei missään olosuhteis-sa vastaa vahingoista, jotka ylittävätZFM merivaihteiston ostohinnan.

Page 68: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Εγχειρίδιο Ιδιοκτήτη ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

68

ELINIKA

Πίνακας Περιεχομένων 1.1 Εισαγωγή ........................................68 2.1 Αναγνώριση ρεβέρσας ....................68 3.1 Περιγραφή .......................................68 4.1 Εγκατάσταση ..................................68 5.1 Λειτουργία ......................................69 6.1 Συντήρηση ......................................70 7.1 Ανίχνευση βλαβών .........................71 8.1 Τεχνικά δεδομένα ...........................72 9.1 Εγγύηση .......................................... 7410.1 ΑΤF..................................................8211.1 Κατάλογος Διανομέων ...................8312.1 Καρτέλα εγγύησης ..........................8413.1 Warranty Card .................................93

1.1 Εισαγωγή

1.1.1 Ευθύνη ΠελάτηΟ πελάτης/χειριστής είναι υπεύθυνος για τηνεκτέλεση των αναγκαίων ελέγχων ασφαλείαςγια τη διασφάλιση τήρησης των απαιτούμενωνκανόνων λίπανσης, ψύξης, συντήρησης γιατην ασφαλή, και απολαυστική λειτουργία.Όλες οι ρεβέρσες καλύπτονται απόεγγύηση. Κατά συνέπεια: Θα πρέπει νατηρούνται αυστηρά οι κανόνες χειρισμούτων μηχανισμών της ρεβέρσας πουπεριλαμβάνονται στο βιβλίο αυτό.

ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗΟ κατασκευαστής δεν φέρει ευθύνη γιαοποιεσδήποτε ζημιές ή απώλειες πουπροκαλούνται από λαθεμένη εγκατάσταση,λαθεμένο χειρισμό του εξοπλισμού και/ήελλιπή συντήρηση.Ο πελάτης πρέπει να φροντίζει για τηναποφυγή των οποιωνδήποτε εξωτερικώνκαταπονήσεων , καθώς επίσης καικραδασμών που προκαλούνται από τιςστρεπτικές και καμπτικές κινήσεις.Η αλληλεπίδραση ανάμεσα στη μηχανή, τονελικοφόρο άξονα και την προπέλα μπορούννα οδηγήσουν σε κραδασμούς πουπροκαλούνται από τα περιστρεφόμενατμήματα, οι οποίοι προκαλούν έναν τύπου«σφυροκοπήματος» θόρυβο στα γρανάζια,γεγονός που μπορεί να προκαλέσει ζημιάστην μηχανή και/ή το σύστημα μετάδοσηςκίνησης.Ο προμηθευτής δεν φέρει ευθύνη γιαοποιουσδήποτε στρεπτικούς κραδασμούςπου έχουν να κάνουν με την εγκατάσταση.

Το εγχειρίδιο αυτό περιλαμβάνει, μεταξύάλλων, και τα ακόλουθα κύρια κεφάλαια:

1.1.2 ΠεριγραφήΑυτό το τμήμα περιγράφει εν συντομία τηνλειτουργία, τον χειρισμό και την σχεδίασητων μηχανημάτων τύπου ψψ.

1.1.3 ΛειτουργίαΤο τμήμα αυτό περιγράφει τις διαδικασίεςγια τη λειτουργία καθώς και όλα τααναγκαία μέτρα ασφαλείας.

1.1.4 ΣυντήρησηΤο τμήμα αυτό περιέχει όλες τις εργασίεςσυντήρησης και επισκευής που εκτελούνταιαπό το χειριστή.Οποτεδήποτε χρησιμοποιούνται οι λέξεις«δεξιά, αριστερά» στο βιβλίο αυτό, θααναφέρονται πάντοτε στην εγκατεστημένηρεβέρσα όταν κινείται με κίνηση πρόσω.Σημαντικές πληροφορίες που αναφέρονται στηντεχνική αξιοπιστία και την ασφάλειαλειτουργίας επισημαίνονται με τις κατάλληλεςλέξεις αναγνώρισης ως ακολούθως:

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗΟποιαδήποτε διαδικασία, μέθοδος,κατάσταση, δήλωση κτλ, η οποία δενακολουθείται πιστά και η οποία θαμπορούσε να προκαλέσει τραυματισμόή και θάνατο του προσωπικού.

ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗΟποιαδήποτε διαδικασία, μέθοδος,κατάσταση, δήλωση, κτλ η οποία δεντηρείται όπως πρέπει, και η οποία θαμπορούσε να προκαλέσει ζημιά ή καιολοσχερή καταστροφή του εξοπλισμού.

Σημείωση: Ισχύει για την τεχνικήαπαίτηση στην οποία ο χειριστής τουεξοπλισμού πρέπει να εφιστά ιδιαιτέρωςτην προσοχή του.

Οι λέξεις ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ,Προσοχή και Σημείωση προηγούνταιπάντοτε του κειμένου στο οποίοαναφέρονται.

2.1 Αναγνώριση ρεβέρσαςΗ πινακίδα προσδιορισμού βρίσκεται στηρεβέρσα.Στην Εικ. 1 παρουσιάζεται παράδειγμαπινακίδας προσδιορισμού:D Σχέση μετάδοσης, φορά περιστροφής

προπέλας αντίθετη από εκείνη τηςμηχανής

A Αριθμός σειράς κιβωτίου οδοντωτώντροχών

E Κάθε χρόνο εκχωρείται ένα καινούριογράμμα με αύξουσα σειρά.

B Κωδικός κιβωτίου οδοντωτών τροχώνE Έκδοση κιβωτίου οδοντωτών τροχώνC Σχέση μετάδοσης, φορά περιστροφής

προπέλας ίδια με εκείνη της μηχανήςF Τύπος κιβωτίου ταχυτήτωνΣημασία των συμβόλων πουχρησιμοποιούνται για το κιβώτιοοδοντωτών τροχών:G Τύπος κιβωτίου ταχυτήτωνH Μέγεθος κιβωτίου οδοντωτών

τροχώνI Έκδοση κιβωτίου οδοντωτών

τροχών

3.1 ΠεριγραφήΟ πελάτης/χειριστής είναι υπεύθυνος γιατην εκτέλεση των αναγκαίων ελέγχωνασφαλείας για να σιγουρευτείτε ότιτηρούνται οι προβλεπόμενοι κανόνεςλίπανσης, ψύξης, συντήρησης και οιπροτεινόμενες μέθοδοι για την ασφαλή,και ευχάριστη λειτουργία.Όλες οι ρεβέρσες καλύπτονται από μίαπεριορισμένη εγγύηση.

Κατά συνέπεια:Θα πρέπει να τηρούνται αυστηρά οιπεριγραφόμενοι κανόνες χειρισμού τωνμηχανισμών της ρεβέρσας.

Σχήμα 2: 1) Ψυγείο. 2) Φλάντζα εξόδου. 3) Πινακίδα αναγνώρισης. 4) Μοχλός ελέγχου. 5) Στήριγμα τηλεχειρισμού. 6) Καμπάνα. 7) Άξονας εισόδου 8) Δείκτης λαδιού.

4.1 ΕγκατάστασηΚατά την τοποθέτηση της ρεβέρσας τύπουZFM, θα πρέπει να σημειώσετε ιδιαίτερατα ακόλουθα σημεία:• Η τοποθέτηση πρέπει να γίνει μόνο απόειδικούς

• Εγκατάσταση υπό κλίση:(Σχήμα 3):Η θέση του κιβωτίου ως προς τον άξοναεισόδου δεν πρέπει να υπερβαίνει τηγωνία των 20° (15° για ZF MIV), σεσυνεχή λειτουργία. Για την όποιαπλευρική επιτρεπτή κλίση απαιτείταισχετική έγκριση του κατασκευαστήκατόπιν αιτήσεως.

• Σύνδεσμοι: Ελαστικός, ως προς τηστρέψη, σύνδεσμος με ακτινικό διάκενο

Page 69: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

69

Εγχειρίδιο Ιδιοκτήτη ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

0,5 mm, που απαιτείται πλευρικά τηςμηχανής: στο πλάϊ της έλικας απαιτείταιευέλικτος ελαστικός σύνδεσμος.

• Σύνδεση μηχανής-ρεβέρσας(Σχήμα 4): 1) Φλάντζα κινητήρα. 2) Στρόφαλος. 3) Ελαστικός σύνδεσμος. 4) Άξονας ρεβέρσας. 5) Φλάντζα ρεβέρσας. 6) Φλάντζα στροφάλου.Μέγιστες επιτρεπτές ακτινικές καιαξονικές τιμές X: B-0,1 mm.

• Σύνδεση άξονα ρεβέρσας-προπέλας(Σχήμα 5 - 6):

• Επιλέξτε ψυγείο με ικανοποιητικήψυκτική ικανότητα

Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες βλέπε τοκεφάλαιο που αναφέρεται στηνεγκατάσταση του εγχειριδίου.Τύπος υγρού: ATF (Υγρό αυτόματηςρεβέρσας), βλέπε κεφάλαιο 10.1.

5.1 ΛειτουργίαΌλα τα κιβώτια οδοντωτών τροχών έχουνπεράσει από σκληρά τεστ λειτουργίαςπροτού παραδοθούν από το εργοστάσιο.Κατά την διάρκεια της συνήθουςλειτουργίας, η αλλαγή ταχύτητας τηςρεβέρσας πρέπει να γίνεται μόνον όταν ημηχανή λειτουργεί στο ρελαντί.Σε έκτακτα περιστατικά είναι επιτρεπτό ναγίνεται η αλλαγή ταχυτήτων με υψηλότερεςταχύτητες.Η σωστή λειτουργία του υδραυλικούκυκλώματος εξασφαλίζεται μόνον εάναλλάζετε τακτικά τα υγρά, όπως ορίζει ηπρογραμματισμένη συντήρηση. (Βλ. κεφ.6.1).Πρέπει κατά καιρούς να γίνονται οπτικοίέλεγχοι για τυχόν διαρροές.

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗΟι εργασίες στην ρεβέρσα πρέπει ναγίνονται μόνον όταν είναι σταματημένηη μηχανή και προπέλα.

ΠροσοχήΠριν από την θέση σε λειτουργία γιαπρώτη φορά, πρέπει να γεμίζετε τηνρεβέρσα με υδραυλικό λάδι.Σχετικά με την διαδικασία γεμίσματοςυδραυλικού υγρού , τον τύπο τουυδραυλικού υγρού, την ποσότητα καιτην στάθμη συμβουλευτείτε το κεφάλαιο6.1.4 που αναφέρονται στην αλλαγή τουυδραυλικού λαδιού.

ΠροσοχήΌταν χρησιμοποιείτε την ρεβέρσα και ηστάθμη του λαδιού υπολείπεται τηςκανονικής τότε θα προκληθούν ζημιέςστα γρανάζια. Επίσης όταν η ποσότητατου λαδιού είναι περισσότερη από τηνκανονική θα προκληθεί διαρροή στιςτσιμούχες του άξονα και στο εξαεριστικότης ρεβέρσας με αποτέλεσμα να αυξηθείη θερμοκρασία λειτουργίας σε μεγάλοβαθμό.

5.1.1 Διαδικασία Λειτουργίας

ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗΠριν θέσε σε λειτουργία την ρεβέρσα ναελέγξετε την στάθμη του υδραυλικούυγρού (βλέπε κεφάλαιο 6.1.1).

ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗΚατά την διάρκεια της κανονικήςλειτουργίας, θα πρέπει η αλλαγήταχυτήτων της ρεβέρσας να γίνεται μετην μηχανή στο ρελαντί.Η αλλαγή ταχυτήτων με υψηλότερεςστροφές της μηχανής μπορεί ναπροκαλέσει καταπόνηση των δίσκωντριβής του συνδέσμου και γιαυτό θαπρέπει να αποφεύγεται αυτό κατά τηνκανονική λειτουργία.

Σημείωση: Μπορείτε να αλλάξετε από τηνθέση πρόσω στην θέση ανάποδα σεπερίπτωση εκτάκτου ανάγκης ακόμα καιόταν οι στροφές της μηχανής είναι υψηλές.

Θέσεις Αλλαγής Ταχυτήτων (σχήμα 7):Α = περιστροφή προπέλας αντίθετη από

την περιστροφή της μηχανήςΝ = θέσης νεκρού σημείουΒ = Φορά περιστροφής προπέλας

αντίθετη από εκείνη της φοράςπεριστροφής της μηχανής.

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗΝα βάζετε μπρος την μηχανή μόνον ότανο μοχλός της ρεβέρσας είναι στην θέσηΝΕΚΡΟΥ ΣΗΜΕΙΟΥ.

Η κανονική θερμοκρασία του λαδιούλειτουργίας της ρεβέρσας πρέπει νακυμαίνεται μεταξύ 50 και 80oC.Η μέγιστη επιτρεπτή θερμοκρασία τουλαδιού ΑTF των 100oC δεν πρέπει να

παραμένει για μεγάλο διάστημα παρά μόνογια πολύ λίγο.

ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗΕάν η θερμοκρασία του υγρού είναι πολύυψηλή, σταματήστε την μηχανή αμέσωςκαι ελέγξτε την στάθμη του υγρού τηςρεβέρσας και το ψυγείο λαδιού για τηνκατάλληλη ροή νερού.Να μην βάλετε μπρος την μηχανή ξανά,παρά μόνον όταν αποκαταστήσετε τηνκανονική λειτουργία.

5.1.2 ΠΛΕΥΣΗ ΜΕΠΑΝΙΑ, ΡΥΜΟΥΛΚΗΣΗ ΉΑΓΚΥΡΟΒΟΛΙΟ

Όταν ο κινητήρας είναι σβηστός και το σκάφοςκινείται με πανιά, ρυμουλκείται ή έχειαγκυροβολήσει, η έλικα μπορεί ναπεριστρέφεται λόγω των ρευμάτων.Αυτό δεν δημιουργεί κανένα κίνδυνο γιατο σύστημα μετάδοσης κίνησης.Στην περίπτωση που τα σκάφος διαθέτειδύο μηχανές , η προπέλα της μηχρησιμοποιούμενης ρεβέρσας μπορεί ναπεριστρέφεται ελεύθερα (ρελαντί)Όταν η μηχανή είναι σταματημένη, τότε ηθέση του μοχλού αλλαγής ταχυτήτων δενπαίζει κανένα ρόλο.

ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗΘέση λειτουργίας της προπέλας στορελαντί: Ο μοχλός αλλαγής ταχυτήτωντης ρεβέρσας πρέπει να είναι στη θέση“N” (Σχήμα 7). Χρησιμοποιήστε τη θέσηαλλαγής ταχυτήτων που είναι αντίθετααπό εκείνη της κίνησης πρόσω για τοκλείδωμα του ελικοφόρου άξονα, αλλιώςμπορεί να πάθει ζημιά η ρεβέρσα.

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗΝα μην εργάζεστε στη ρεβέρσα ότανρυμουλκείτε το σκάφος ούτε να ρίχνετεάγκυρα, γιατί μπορεί να αρχίσει ναγυρίζει η προπέλα.

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗΝα μην εργάζεστε στη ρεβέρσα σε σκάφητα οποία διαθέτουν δύο μηχανές, ότανέχει τεθεί σε λειτουργία η μία μονάδακαι αυτό επειδή ο άξονας της προπέλαςτης ρεβέρσας που δεν λειτουργεί θααρχίσει να περιστρέφεται.

Page 70: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Εγχειρίδιο Ιδιοκτήτη ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

70

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Όταν η μηχανή λειτουργεί στο ρελαντίχωρίς όμως να λειτουργεί ο ελικοφόροςάξονας (όπως στην περίπτωση πουγίνεται φόρτιση της μπαταρίας με τηνγεννήτρια), ο μοχλός αλλαγήςταχυτήτων (σχήμα 7) πρέπει νακρατηθεί στη θέση ΝΕΚΡΟΥΣΗΜΕΙΟΥ (Ν) για να μην μπορεί νακινηθεί το σκάφος.Να αποφεύγετε να χρησιμοποιείτε τουδραυλικό κιβώτιο οδοντωτών τροχώνόταν είναι στην θέση ΝΕΚΡΟΥΣΗΜΕΙΟΥ σε υψηλές στροφές τηςμηχανής για μεγάλο χρονικό διάστημα.

5.1.3 ΣΥΣΤΗΜΑ ΕΛΕΓΧΟΥ

ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗΒεβαιωθείτε ότι κινείται εύκολα η ντίζαμετάδοσης κίνησης.

Μετακίνηση μοχλού χειρισμού:ZF 5 M - 10 M- 12 M - 15 M - 15 MA -15 MIV - 25 M - 25 MA - 30 M.Η ελάχιστη διαδρομή του μοχλού αλλαγήςταχυτήτων (N-A=N-B) πρέπει να είναι 35mm για το εξωτερικό σημείο περιστροφήςκαι 30 mm για το εσωτερικό σημείοπεριστροφής.

Σχήμα 8:1) Βίδα στερέωσης μοχλού ροπή

σύσφιξης 22 ± 1 Nm.2) Ελάχιστη διαδρομή ντίζας μετάδοσης.3) Μη βγάζετε το καπάκι.4) Τάπα εκκένωσης λαδιού.Ροπή σύσφιξης: Ma = 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).

Μετακίνηση μοχλού χειρισμού::ZF 4-1 MΗ διαδρομή του μοχλού αλλαγήςταχυτήτων (N-A=N-B) πρέπει να είναι38,5± για το εξωτερικό σημείοπεριστροφής και 33,5±1,5 mm για τοεσωτερικό σημείο περιστροφής, από τηθέση νεκρού σημείου. Όταν ο μοχλόςπεράσει πάνω από την γωνία των 10ο-12ο ,αρχίζει να κινείται έξω από τηνκατακόρυφο για τον έλεγχο της ντίζαςμετάδοσης κίνησης. Ο μοχλός αλλαγήςταχυτήτων μπορεί να στερεωθεί σεοποιαδήποτε θέση μέσω της βίδαςσφιξίματος. Η ελάχιστη απόσταση μεταξύτου μοχλού αλλαγής ταχυτήτων και τουκαπακιού είναι 0,5mm. Απαιτείται

ρύθμιση (από ειδικευμένο προσωπικόμόνο) του ανοίγματος ή της χαλάρωσηςτου καπακιού.

Σχήμα 9:1) Βίδα στερέωσης μοχλού ροπή

σύσφιξης 22 ± 1 Nm.2) Τάπα εκκένωσης λαδιού.3) Μη βγάζετε το καπάκι.

Θέση μοχλού: Στη θέση νεκρού σημείουη οποία είναι κάθετη προς τη ντίζαελέγχου.Ο μοχλός αλλαγής ταχυτήτωνμπορεί να στερεωθεί σε οποιαδήποτε θέσημέσω της βίδας σφιξίματος. Η ελάχιστηαπόσταση μεταξύ του μοχλού αλλαγήςταχυτήτων και του καλύμματος 0,5mm.Για το άνοιγμα ή τη χαλάρωση τουκαλύμματος απαιτείται εκ νέου ρύθμιση(από εξειδικευμένο προσωπικό μόνον).

Σχήμα 10:1) Δείκτης λαδιού και τάπα ανεφοδιασμού

λαδιού (17 mm)Ροπή σύσφιξης: Ma = 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).

2) Απόσταση μοχλού ελέγχου από τοκαπάκι ελάχ. 0,5 mm.

ΕΛΕΓΧΟΙ: Για να εξασφαλίζεται η σωστήλειτουργία, πρέπει να ελέγχετε τακτικά τηθέση του μοχλού.

6.1 Συντήρηση

6.1.1 Έλεγχος στάθμηςυδραυλικού υγρού

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗΝα μην εργάζεστε στην ρεβέρσα ότανρυμουλκείτε το σκάφος ή όταν έχετερίξει άγκυρα επειδή μπορεί να αρχίσεινα περιστρέφεται η προπέλα, ή κατά τηνπόντιση της άγκυρας σε ένα ποτάμι,επειδή μπορεί να αρχίσει να γυρίζει ηπροπέλα.

ΠΕΡΙΓΡΑΦΗ ΔΕΙΚΤΗ ΛΑΔΙΟΥ (Εικ. 11):1) Επιφάνεια κιβωτίου.2) Δείκτης λαδιού.3) Στάθμη λαδιού.4) Λάδι ATF.5) Ροδέλα στεγανότητας.

Η στάθμη του υγρού πρέπει να ελεγχθείξανά μετά από μικρό χρονικό διάστημαλειτουργίας.

ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Ελέγχετε πάντοτε τη στάθμητου λαδιού πριν θέσετε σε λειτουργία τηρεβέρσα εφαρμόζοντας την ακόλουθηδιαδικασία.- Λασκάρετε τον δείκτη ελέγχου στάθμηςτου υγρού (σχήμα 11) γυρίζοντας τηνλαβή προς τα αριστερά.

- Σκουπίστε τον δείκτη στάθμης λαδιούμε ένα καθαρό πανί χωρίς ξέφτια

- Τοποθετήστε ξανά τον δείκτη ελέγχουστάθμης λαδιού χωρίς να τον βιδώσετε .Ξαναβγάλτε τον δείκτη ελέγχου στάθμηςλαδιού και ελέγξτε την στάθμη. Ηστάθμη του λαδιού πρέπει να βρίσκεταιμεταξύ των σημαδιού minimum καιmaximum (3,4 σχήμα 11).

- Τοποθετήστε τον δείκτη ελέγχουστάθμης λαδιού και ασφαλίστε τονπεριστρέφοντας την λαβή προς τα δεξιά

ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗΑνάλογα με τον τύπο και την διάταξη τουψυγείου και των σωλήνωνσυγκεντρώνεται μία ορισμένη ποσότηταλαδιού μετά το σταμάτημα της μηχανήςη οποία και επιστρέφει στην ρεβέρσαμετά από μεγάλο χρονικό διάστημαπαραμονής εκτός λειτουργίας.Αυτό μπορεί να προκαλέσει τηνυπέρβαση της στάθμης του λαδιού στηνρεβέρσα πέραν του σημαδιού max.Να μην αφαιρέσετε την επιπλέονποσότητα λαδιού, αλλά να προχωρήσετεστα βήματα.

- Αφήστε την μηχανή να λειτουργεί στορελαντί με τον μοχλό αλλαγήςταχυτήτων στην θέση ΝΕΚΡΟΥΣΗΜΕΙΟΥ, μέχρις ότου το ψυγείο τουυδραυλικού υγρού και όλοι οι σωλήνεςγεμίσουν με το υγρό.

- Σβήστε την μηχανή και ελέγξτε τηνστάθμη του υγρού σε μικρό χρονικόδιάστημα.Εάν χρειαστεί, συμπληρώστευγρό για να φέρετε την στάθμη τουυγρού στην κανονική θέση στον δείκτηελέγχου στάθμης λαδιού.Η στάθμη του υγρού στον δείκτηελέγχου στάθμης (σχήμα 11) πρέπει ναβρίσκεται μεταξύ των σημαδιών min καιmax.

6.1.2 Αλλαγή λαδιού

ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗΗ πρώτη αλλαγή πρέπει να γίνει μετάαπό 25 ώρες λειτουργίας.

Page 71: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

71

Εγχειρίδιο Ιδιοκτήτη ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

Ολες οι επόμενες αλλαγές υγρού πρέπεινα γίνονται κάθε 300 ώρες λειτουργίαςή μία φορά το χρόνο (ανάλογα με το πιοεκ των δύο θα συμβεί πρώτο).

ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗΤα παλιά λιπαντικά πρέπει ναδιατίθενται ως ειδικά απορρίμματα πουρυπαίνουν το περιβάλλον: κατά συνέπειαπρέπει να παραδίδονται σε κέντραδιαφοροποιημένης συλλογής.

6.1.3 Αποστράγγιση του υγρούτης ρεβέρσας

Βγάλτε την τάπα (1 Εικ. 12) και αφήστενα τρέξει το λάδι από το ειδικό άνοιγμαστο κάτω μέρος του κιβωτίου.

6.1.4 Γέμισμα της ρεβέρσας μευδραυλικό υγρό.

Γεμίστε με λάδι για αυτόματα σασμάν ATFχρησιμοποιώντας τις ενδεδειγμένεςποσότητες. Προσθέστε την ποσότητα πουθεωρείτε αναγκαία για την πλήρωση τουεναλλάκτη θερμότητας και των σχετικώνσωλήνων σύνδεσης

ZF 4-1 M: .......................... 0,30 λίτραZF 5 M: ............................. 0,30 λίτραZF 10 M: ........................... 0,35 λίτραZF 12 M: ........................... 0,55 λίτραZF 15 M: ........................... 0,55 λίτραZF 15 MA: ......................... 0,50 λίτραZF 15 MIV: ........................ 1,00 λίτραZF 25 M: ........................... 0,75 λίτραZF 25 MA: ......................... 0,75 λίτραZF 30 M: . min. 0,90 - max. 1,10 λίτρα• Ισχύει για κλίσεις του άξονα μικρότερεςτων 20° (15° για ZF MIV).

Χρησιμοποιείτε μόνο λάδι για αυτόματασασμάν σύμφωνα με τις προδιαγραφές της“Λίστας συνιστώμενων λαδιών” στησελ.82

6.1.5 Δοκιμαστική Διαδρομή1) Κάντε μία δοκιμαστική λειτουργία

μετά την αλλαγή του λαδιού.2) Τοποθετήστε τον μοχλό αλλαγής

ταχυτήτων στην θέση Νεκρού Σημείου(Ν). Βάλτε μπροστά την μηχανή καιαφήστε την να λειτουργεί στο ρελαντίγια σύντομο χρονικό διάστημα έτσιώστε να γεμίσει το ψυγείο και οισωλήνες με το λάδι ρεβέρσας.

3) Σταματήστε την μηχανή και ελέγξτε

7.1 Αναζήτηση βλαβών

Πρώτα από όλα να ελέγξετε εάν έχουν γίνει όλα σύμφωνα με τις οδηγίες λειτουργίας.

ξανά την στάθμη του λαδιού. Εάνχρειαστεί, συμπληρώστε λάδι. Πρέπεινα αφαιρέσετε την όποια περίσσειαποσότητα λαδιού.Η στάθμη του υδραυλικού λαδιού στονδείκτη ελέγχου στάθμης (σχήμα 14,εξάρτημα Ι) πρέπει να βρίσκεταιμεταξύ των σημαδιών min και max.Η στάθμη του υδραυλικού λαδιού πρέπεινα ελεγχθεί ξανά μετά από σύντομοχρονικό διάστημα λειτουργίας.

6.1.6 Απόσυρση από τηλειτουργία για ορισμένοχρονικό διάστημα

Εάν πρόκειται να αποσύρετε την ρεβέρσαγια μεγάλο χρονικό διάστημα, γιαπαράδειγμα, θέση εκτός λειτουργίας κατάτην διάρκεια του χειμώνα, θα πρέπει ναγεμίζετε την ρεβέρσα με το λάδιαυτομάτου ρεβέρσας (ATF) για να μηνπροκληθεί διάβρωση της ρεβέρσας.

ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗΝα αλλάξετε το υδραυλικό λάδι ότανπρόκειται να θέσετε σε λειτουργία ξανάτην ρεβέρσα.

Σύμπτωμα1. Υψηλή θερμοκρασία υδραυλικού υγρού.

2. Παρουσία υγρού στο κέλυφος της ρεβέρσας

3. Γίνεται δύσκολα η αλλαγή ταχυτήτων

4. Η σύμπλεξη αργεί να γίνει

5. Δεν κινείται το σκάφος

Πιθανή αιτίαΗ στάθμη του υγρού ανεβαίνει κατά τηνδιάρκεια της λειτουργίας.Η στάθμη του υδραυλικού λαδιού είναιχαμηλή.Βούλωμα ή περιορισμός του ψυγείουυδραυλικού λαδιού.Δεν υπάρχει νερό στο σύστημα του ψυγείου.άγνωστη αιτίαΛασκάρισμα βιδώνΛασκάρισμα κοχλιωτών συνδέσεωνΛασκάρισμα του δείκτη ελέγχου στάθμης.Υψηλή στάθμη λαδιού κατά τη λειτουργίαΜοχλός επιλογής ταχυτήτων

ΣυνδεσμολογίαΜοχλός επιλογής ταχυτήτων

ΣυνδεσμολογίαΜοχλό επιλογήςΑκατάλληλη θέση επιλογέαΈχει χαθεί η προπέλαΣπάσιμο ελικοφόρου άξοναΔυσλειτουργία της ρεβέρσαςΔυσλειτουργία μηχανής

ΑποκατάστασηΑδειάστε με την αντλία υδραυλικό λάδι μέχριτην θέση max στο δείκτη ελέγχου στάθμης.Συμπλήρωση υδραυλικού λαδιού.

Αντικατάσταση ψυγείου και ξέπλυμα τουδικτύου νερού.Έλεγχος του συστήματος ψύξης και επισκευήΣυμβουλευτείτε εξουσιοδοτημένο συνεργείοΣφίξιμο σύμφωνα με τις προδιαγραφές.Σφίξιμο, αντικατάστασηΣφίξιμο, αντικατάστασηΑδειάστε λάδι μέχρι το σημάδι MAXΣυμβουλευτείτε ένα εξουσιοδοτημένοκατάστημαΡύθμισηΣυμβουλευτείτε ένα εξουσιοδοτημένοκατάστημαΡύθμισηΣυμβουλευτείτε εξουσιοδοτημένο συνεργείοΡύθμισηΑντικατάστασηΣυμβουλευτείτε εξουσιοδοτημένο συνεργείοΣυμβουλευτείτε εξουσιοδοτημένο συνεργείοΣυμβουλευτείτε εξουσιοδοτημένο συνεργείο

Page 72: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Εγχειρίδιο Ιδιοκτήτη ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

72

8.1 Τεχνικά Δεδομένα

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 5 M 2.045 1.864 0.0066 0.0088 18 25 20 27 20 27 5000 8.5 19 SAE 6, B/W

2.722 2.150 0.0047 0.0063 13 18 14 19 17 23 5000 Max input power 20 kW

Technical Data for Pleasure Craft DutyBased on engine power B to DIN 6270; shock factorK = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MA 1.875 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13.5 30 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 39 53 47 63 50 67 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 2.136 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 M 1.556 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

1.875 1.955 Max input power 55 kW.Ratio 1.556 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 12 M 2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 37 49 39 53 47 63 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 31 42 33 45 40 54 5000 Max input power 55 kW

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 95 Nm (70 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 10 M 1.482 1.864 0.0109 0.0146 30 41 33 44 38 51 5000 10.3 23 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W

1.792 1.864 Max input power 38 kW.2.045 1.864 0.0095 0.0128 27 36 29 38 34 46 5000 Ratio 1.482 «B» Pos.2.722 2.150 0.0068 0.0091 19 26 20 27 25 33 5000 max torque 95 Nm. Ratio

1.792 «B» Pos. maxtorque 95 Nm.

Page 73: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

73

Εγχειρίδιο Ιδιοκτήτη ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

* Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».** Max 45 kW for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MIV 2.134 2.224 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 21 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.718 2.224 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.995 2.224 Ratio 2.134 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder - K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders - K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 230 Nm (170 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 M 1.880 2.095 0.0262 0.0351 79 105 80 107 80 107 5000 18.5 41 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.273 2.095 0.0216 0.0289 65 87 78 104 80 107 5000 Max input power 80 kW.2.737 2.722 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Ratio 1.880 «B» Pos.

max torque 230 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 185 Nm (137 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 30 M 2.148 2.636 0.0241 0.0323 72 97 87 116 92 123 5000 23 51 4 & 5 Yanmar JH

2.696 2.636 Max input power 95 kW.Ratio 2.148 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.Ratio 2.696 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 169 Nm (125 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 MA 2.227 2.737 0.0215 0.0288 64 86 77 104 80 107 5000 21.1 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.737 2.737 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Max input power 80 kW.8 degrees Ratio 2.227 «B» Pos.

max torque 169 Nm.

Page 74: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Εγχειρίδιο Ιδιοκτήτη ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

74

9.1 Eγγύηση

9.1.1 Βασική ΕγγύησηΗ ZF HURTH MARINE εγγυάται τηρεβέρσα τύπου ZFM ότι είναι απαλλαγμένηελαττωμάτων σε ότι αφορά την ποιότηταεργασίας και τα υλικά υπό συνθήκεςκανονικής λειτουργίας και συντήρησης, υπότην προϋπόθεση ότι η εγγύηση αυτή θαισχύει αν, και μόνον εάν, έχει εγκατασταθείκαι λειτουργεί ο εξοπλισμός σύμφωνα με τονπροβλεπόμενο από το κατασκευαστή τρόπο.Η υποχρέωση της ZF HURTH MARINEβάσει της παρούσας εγγύησης , θαπεριορίζεται στην αντικατάσταση ή τηνεπισκευή, κατά τη διακριτική ευχέρεια της,οποιουδήποτε τμήματος ή τμημάτων πουδιαπιστωθεί από την ZF HURTHMARINE ότι είναι ελαττωματικά, μετάαπό εξέταση των ανωτέρω, υπό τηνπροϋπόθεση ότι το τμήμα ή τα τμήματαθα επιστραφούν στο πλησιέστεροεξουσιοδοτημένο κατάστημα της ZFHURTH MARINE, με προπληρωμένο τοναύλο, εντός χρονικού διαστήματος:Είκοσι τεσσάρων (24) μηνών από τηνημερομηνία παράδοσης σε πλήρηλειτουργία ή τριάντα έξι (36) μηνών απότην ημερομηνία παράδοσης στονκατασκευαστή της μηχανής, οποιοδήποτεεκ των δύο συμβεί πρώτα.Οι υποχρεώσεις της ZF HURTH MARINEβάσει της παρούσας εγγύησης, όπωςαναφέρονται εις το παρόν θα υπόκεινται,επίσης, σε συμμόρφωση εκ μέρους τουδιανομέα ή του κατασκευαστή της μηχανήςο οποίος έχει προμηθευτεί το προϊόν μετις διαδικασίες περί της εγγυήσεως, οιοποίες αποτελούν αναπόσπαστο τμήμα τηςπαρούσας εγγύησης.Όλες οι εγγυήσεις θα παραδίδονται στουςδιανομείς και τους κατασκευαστές τηςμηχανής οι οποίοι αγόρασαν την ναυτικήρεβέρσα τύπου ZF. Η παρούσα εγγύησηδεν θα ισχύει για οποιοδήποτε τμήμα ήτμήματα τα οποία έχουν επισκευαστεί ήυποστεί μετατροπή, χωρίς τηνπροηγούμενη σύμφωνη γνώμη τουεπισήμου αντιπροσώπου της ZF HURTHMARINE.Η παρούσα εγγύηση δεν θα ισχύει εάν τοπροϊόν ή οποιοδήποτε από τα παρελκόμενάτου ή εξαρτήματα αυτού έχουνχρησιμοποιηθεί καταχρηστικώς, ή δενέχουν τύχει της προβλεπόμενης φροντίδαςκαι συντήρησης ή έχουν υποστεί βλάβη εξ’ατυχήματος, ή η λειτουργία τους δεν έχειγίνει σύμφωνα με τις τυπωμένες οδηγίες

της ZF HURTH MARINE ή έχουνλειτουργήσει υπό συνθήκες πιο αντίξοεςαπό τις προβλεπόμενες, ή συνθήκες πουυπερβαίνουν εκείνες οι οποίες ορίζονταιστις προδιαγραφές για το εν λόγω προϊόν,ή έχουν εγκατασταθεί ή ξανα-εγκατασταθεί λαθεμένα ή δεν έχει γίνεισωστά η συντήρηση και η λειτουργίααυτών.Η παρούσα εγγύηση αντικαθιστά ρητώς όλεςτις άλλες εγγυήσεις, ρητές ήσυμπερασματικές, περιλαμβανομένων καιτων εγγυήσεων εμπορευσιμότητας καικαταλληλότητας για χρήση, υποκαθιστά δεόλες τις άλλες υποχρεώσεις πουπεριλαμβάνουν απεριορίστως τις αποθετικέςζημιές και η ZF HURTH MARINE δεναναλαμβάνει καμία υποχρέωση ούτεεξουσιοδοτεί κανένα άτομο να αναλάβει γιαλογαριασμό της ZF HURTH MARINEοποιαδήποτε άλλη υποχρέωση σχετικά μετην πώληση ρεβερσών τύπου ZFM RE-VERSING MARINE TRANSMISSION.Η ZF HURTH MARINE δεν θα είναιυπεύθυνη σε καμία περίπτωση γιαοποιαδήποτε παραβίαση της εγγύησης σεοποιοδήποτε μέτρο που υπερβαίνει το τίμημααγοράς της ρεβέρσας τύπου ZFM RE-VERSING MARINE TRANSMISSION.

Page 75: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

75

Radni Priručnik ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

Hrvatski

Sadržaj 1.1 Uvod .......................................... 75 2.1 Prepoznavanje brodskog

prijenosa ................................... 75 3.1 Opis ........................................... 75 4.1 Instaliranje ................................ 75 5.1 Rad ............................................76 6.1 Održavanje ............................... 77 7.1 Tra�enje kvarova ...................... 78 8.1 Tehnički podaci ........................ 79 9.1 Jamstvo .................................... 8110.1 Popis preporučenih ulja ........... 8211.1 Popis ovlaštenih servisa .......... 8312.1 Montažni nacrti ......................... 8413.1 Warranty Card .......................... 93

1.1 Uvod

1.1.1 OBVEZE KUPCAKupac je odgovoran za obavljanje pro-vjera iz ovoga priručnika kako bi pod-mazivanje, hlađenje i održavanje bro-dskog pri jenosa bi l i u skladu sazahtjevima i rad ostao unutar sigurno-snih granica.Svaki se brodski prijenos isporučuje sjamstvom, koje vrijedi ukoliko sedosljedno provode upute iz ovogapriručnika.

PAŽNJAProizvođač nije odgovoran za bilokakav kvar ili oštećenje prouzroko-vano pogrešnom montažom, pogre-šnim korištenjem opreme i nedovolj-nim održavanjem. Kupac se prijemontaže treba uvjeriti da ne postojenikakve vanjske sile, primjerice tor-zijske vibracije prouzrokovane ra-dijalnim ili aksijalnim savijanjem.Spojevi motora, osovine i propeleramogu proizvesti torzijske vibracijeuzrokujući udarnu buku u zupčani-cima s mogućnošću oštećenja mo-tora i/ili brodskog prijenosa.Proizvođač nije odgovoran zatorzijske vibracije koje nastaju zbogmontaže.

Ovaj priručnik ima tri glavna poglavlja:

1.1.2 OPISPoglav l je ukratko opisuje rad,korištenje i dijelove brodskog prijenosaZFM.

1.1.3 KORIŠTENJEPoglavlje opisuje postupke korištenja isve potrebne mjere sigurnosti.

1.1.4 ODRŽAVANJEPoglavlje sadrži sve upute potrebne zaodržavanje i servisiranje kojih se kupacmora pridržavati.Pojmovi „lijevo, desno, lijevi bok i desnibok“ koji se rabe u ovom priručnikuuvijek se odnose na brodske prijenosemontirane u pravcu kretanja premanaprijed.Važne informacije koje se odnose natehničku ispravnost i na sigurnostkorištenja istaknute su na sljedećinačin:

OPASNOSTSvi postupci, radnje, uvjeti, prepo-ruke, i sl. koji, ukoliko ih se korisnikizričito ne pridržava, mogu uzroko-vati štetu ili smrt korisnika.

PAŽNJASvi postupci, radnje, uvjeti, prepo-ruke, i sl. koji, ukoliko ih se korisnikizričito ne pridržava moguprouzročiti štetu ili uništenje opre-me.

Napomena Odnose se na tehničkepostupke kojima korisnik opreme moraposvetiti osobitu pažnju.

OPASNOST, PAŽNJA i Napomenavijek se nalaze ispred teksta na koji seodnose.

2.1 Prepoznavanjebrodskog prijenosa

Identifikaciona tablica je postavljena naizmjenjivaèu.Sl. 1 pokazuje jedan primjer identifika-cione tablice:A Serijski broj brodskog prijenosa.

B Kod prijenosa.C Odnos prijenosa za propeler koji se

vrti u istom smjeru kao motor.D Odnos prijenosa za propeler koji se

vrti u suprotnom smjeru od motora.E Svake se godine pridjeljuje novo

(sljedeće) slovo.F Tip brodskog prijenosa.Značenje simbola brodskog prijenosaG Tip brodskog prijenosa.H Veličina brodskog prijenosaI Verzija brodskog prijenosa

3.1 OpisZFM brodski prijenosi su uređaji shelikoidalnim zupčanicima upravljaniautomatskim sklopom. Ističu se zbogrobusnosti i pouzdanosti. Posebnopreporučujemo pažljivo pridržavanjeovih uputa za montažu, uporabu iodržavanje.Nepridržavanje uputa iz ovogpriručnika ili bilo kakva neovlaštenaprepravka na invertoru prouzrokujegubitak jamstva.Na zahtjev proizvođač isporučujeuputstvo za popravak.

Sl 2: 1) Izmjenjivač 2) Izlazna prirubnica 3) Identifikacijska tablica 4) Poluga za pokretanje. 5) pritezač daljinskog upravljača. 6) Zvono. 7) Ulazna osovina 8) Mjerna šipka ulja

4.1 InstaliranjeZa montažu brodskom prijenosa ZFMpotrebno je postupiti prema sljedećimuputama:• Montažu mogu izvesti samo specija-

lizirano osoblje.• Kosi položaj: (Sl. 3):

Pozicija prijenosa, u odnosu naulaznu osovinu, ne smije biti više odkuta 20° (15° za ZF MIV), uneprestanom pogonu.Za kut bočnog nagiba obratiti seproizvođaču.

• Elastični zglob: Između motora i

Page 76: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Radni Priručnik ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

76

brodskog prijenosa potrebno jepostaviti elastični vezni zglob sminimalnim radijalnim hodom(0,5mm); između brodskog prijenosai osovine propelera preporučuje seveza pomoću elastičnog zgloba.

• Uparivanje motora i prijenosa (Sl. 4):1) Prirubnica motora2) Zamašnjak3) Elastični spoj4) Osovina brodskog prijenosa5) Prirubnica brodskog prijenosa6) Prirubnica zamašnjakaMaksimalne dozvoljene radijalne iaksijalne vrijednosti X: B-0,1 mm.

• Uparivanje prijenosa i osovinepropelera: (Sl. 5 - 6):

• Ispravno upariti prijenos i motor.Više pojedinosti navedeno je uuputama za montažu.Vrsta ulja: ATF (ulje za automatskemjenjače) vidi pogl. 10.1.

5.1 RadPrije isporuke svi uređaji podvrgnuti supokusnom radu.U normalnim uvjetima rada promjenasmjera kretanja dozvoljena je samo prinajmanjem broju okretaja motora. Uslučaju nužde ipak je dozvoljenapromjena smjera kretanja pri višimbrojem okretaja.Ispravno djelovanje vodenog kruga jezajamčeno samo u slučaju da seredovito mijenja hidraulično ulje, kaošto je i predviđeno kod programiranogodržavanja(Vidi poglavlje 6.1).Povremeno vizualno provjerite da nepostoje gubici ulja.

OPASNOSTPristupiti radovima na brodskomprijenosu samo kad su motor ipropeler zaustavljeni.

PAŽNJAPrije prvog pokretanja u prijenos semora naliti predviđeno hidrauličkoulje. Za postupke punjenja, za tip ikoličinu i razinu tekućine, vidi po-glavlja 6.1.4

PAŽNJAKorištenje brodskg prijenosa s ne-dovoljnom količinom tekućineoštećuje zupčanike. Prevelika količi-na ulja može prouzrokovati gubitkena brtvi i na ispustu te može znatnopovećati radnu temperaturu.

5.1.1 STAVLJANJE U RAD

PAŽNJAPrije stavljanja brodskom prijenosau rad provjeriti razinu ulja (vidi po-glavlje 6.1.1).

PAŽNJAU normalnim radnim uvjetimapoložaj upravljačke poluge zapromjenu smjera kretanja mora sepromijeniti pri radu motora naminimumu.

Promjene pri višim brojem okretajamogu preopteretiti diskove kvačila,a to treba izbjegavati prilikom nor-malnog rada.

Napomena U slučaju nužde, smjerkretanja (naprijed – natrag) može sepromijeniti i pri velikim brzinamamotora.

RADNI POLOŽAJI (slika 7):A = Smjer okretanja propelera obrnut

od smjera okretanja motoraN = Položaj praznog hodaB = Smjer okretanja propelera isti kao

smjer okretanja motora

OPASNOSTMotor pokrenuti samo kad je upra-vljačka poluga u položaju praznogahoda.

Radna temperatura ulja prijenosa morabiti između 50°C (122°F) i 80°C(176°F). Maksimalna temperatura ATFulja od 100°C (212°F) dozvoljena jesamo tijekom kratkog vremenskograzdoblja.

PAŽNJAUkoliko je temperatura previsoka,odmah zaustavite motor, provjeriterazinu tekućine u brodskom prijeno-su i ispravnost rada izmjenjivačatopline. Ne stavljajte plovilo u pokretukoliko nije otklonjen uzrok neispra-vnosti rada.

5.1.2 PLOVIDBA NA JEDRATEGLJENJEILI USIDRENJE

Kada je motor isključen i plovilo ide najedra, u slučaju da je tegljeno ili jeusidreno, propeler se može vrtjeti radistrujanja vode.Ova pojava ne oštećuje prijenos. Uplovilu s dva motora, kad je samo jedanmotor u radu, propeler isključenogmotora može se slobodno okretati.Kad je motor iskl jučen, položajupravljačke poluge je nebitan.

PAŽNJAKad je osovina propelera uslobodnom položaju, upravljačkapoluga mora biti u položaju“N„(Sl.7).U slučaju potrebe za blokiranjemosovine propelera koristiti položajsuprotan od smjera kretanja plovila,inače se oštećuje prijenosni sklop.

OPASNOSTNe poduzimajte nikakve zahvate naprijenosu tijekom tegljenja plovila ilikad je plovilo usidreno u rijeci, jerse propeler može okretati.

OPASNOSTNe poduzimajte nikakve zahvate naprijenosu kod dvojne instalacije kadje jedan od dvaju motora u radu.Propeler zaustavljenog motora semože okretati.

OPASNOSTKad je motor uključen na minimu-mu, a propeler treba mirovati (pri-

Page 77: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

77

Radni Priručnik ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

mjerice kad je potrebno napunitiakumulator), upravljačka polugamora biti u neutralnom položaju N(sl. 7).Izbjegavati okretanje hidrauličkogbrodskog prijenosa u neutralnipoložaj pri visokom broju okretajatijekom duljeg vremena.

5.1.3 SISTEM ZA UPRAVLJANJE

PAŽNJAProvjeriti da li se upravljačka sajlamože slobodno pomicati.

Korisni hod:ZF 5 M - 10 M- 12 M - 15 M - 15 MA15 MIV - 25 M - 25 MA - 30 M.Minimalni korisni hod (N-A=N-B)uprav l jačke poluge, mjereno navanjskom otvoru za priključak, mora bitibarem 35mm; ako se mjeri izunutarnjeg otvora mora biti barem 30mm.

Sl. 8:1) Vijak za pričvršćivanje, stezni

moment 22 ± 1 Nm.2) Minimalni hod za upravljačku sajlu3) Ne skidati poklopac4) Čep ispusta ulja

Stezni moment: Ma = 22 Nm (16lb-ft).

Korisni hod:ZF 4-1 MMinimalni korisni hod (N-A=N-B)duprav ljačke poluge, mjereno navanjskom otvoru za priključak, mora biti38,5±1,5mm; ako se mjeri izunutarnjeg otvora mora biti barem 33,5mm. Iz položaja praznog hoda, kadpoluga rotira za 10°-12°, ona se počinjekretati i u okomitom smjeru premanaprijed i zaustavlja se na kraju hoda(kut od 40°).

Sl. 9:1) Vijak za pričvršćivanje, stezni

moment 22 ± 1 Nm.2) Ne otpustiti maticu3) Ne skidati poklopac

Položaj poluge: U položaju praznoghoda mora biti okomita na upravljačkusajlu. Poluga se može okretati tepričvrstiti u bilo kojem položaju pomoćusteznog vijka. Poluga mora udaljena odpoklopca barem za 0,5mm.Demontaža ili samo otpuštanje vijakapoklopca zahtijevaju novo podešavanje(koje mora obaviti ovlašteno osoblje).

Sl.10:1) Mjerna šipka i čep za otvor za

dopunu ulja 17mmStezni moment: Ma = 20 Nm (15lb-ft).

2) Udaljenost upravljačke poluge odpoklopca min. 0,5mm

KONTROLE: u svrhu osiguranjapravilnog djelovanja, potrebno jeredovito kontrolirati položaj poluge.

6.1 Održavanje

6.1.1 PROVJERA RAZINE ULJA

OPASNOSTNe poduzimajte nikakve zahvate naprijenosu tijekom tegljenja plovila ilikad je plovilo usidreno u rijeci, jerse propeler može okretati.

OPIS MJERNE ŠIPKE ULJA (Sl. 11):1) Površina kućišta2) Razina ulja3) Mjerna šipka4) Ulje ATF5) Podmetak za držanje.

Provjera ulja je moguća na hladno ilina vruće.

NAPOMENA: Prije stavljanja u radizmjenjivaèa, uvijek kontrolirati nivoulja, djelujuæi na sljedeæi naèin.- Otpustiti mjernu šipku ulja (sl. 11)

ručno je okrećuć i u smjerusuprotnom od kazaljke na satu, zatimje izvući.

- Šipku očistiti čistom krpom bezprašine.

- Vratiti šipku u otvor bez zavrtanja ;

izvaditi šipku i provjeriti da li je razinaulja unutar granica maksimuma iminimuma (3-4 sl. 11).

- Vratiti šipku u otvor te je pričvrstitiokrećući je u smjeru kazaljke na satu.

PAŽNJAU trenutku isključenja motora uljekoje se nalazi u hidrauličkom krugupretočit će se u prijenos; količinaovoga ulja ovisi o vrsti izmjenjivačai hidrauličkog kruga koji se koristeza hlađenje. Nakon određenogvremena ulje se taloži u brodskomprijenosu što uzrokuje podizanjerazine ulja. Nemojte uklanjati višakulja već postupite prema točkama.

- Pustite da motor radi na minimumus brodskim prijenosom u položajupraznog hoda do punjenja uljemizmjenjivača topline i ci jev ihidrauličkog kruga.

- Isključite motor i odmah provjeriterazinu ulja; po potrebi nadolijte.Razina tekućine mora biti unutaroznaka maksimuma i minimumakoje se nalaze na šipki (sl. 11). Nakonkratkog vremena ponovite postupak.

6.1.2 ZAMJENA ULJA

PAŽNJAPrva zamjena ulja mora se obavitinakon 25 sati rada. Sve sljedećezamjene moraju se obaviti baremnakon 300 sati rada, a u svakomslučaju razdoblje zamjene ne smijebiti dulje od jedne godine.

PAŽNJAIstrošeno mazivo ulje treba obraditikao poseban otpad štetan za okoliš:i treba ga stoga otpremiti shodnonjegovom diferencijalnom sastavu.

6.1.3 ISPUŠTANJE ULJASkinuti čep (1 Sl. 12) i pustiti da se uljepretoči u namjensku rupu koja se nalaziu doljnjem dijelu kutije.

Page 78: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Radni Priručnik ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

78

7.1 Traženje kvarova

Najprije provjeriti da li su provedeni svi postupci iz uputa opisanih u prijašnjim točkama.

6.1.4 PUNJENJE ATF ULJEMNapuniti ulje za automatske mjenjaèeATF po�tivajuæi kolièine u nastavkunavedene. Dodati kolièinu koja sesmatra kao neophodna za punjenjerazmjenjivaèa toplote i odgovarajuæihcijevi za spajanje.ZF 4-1 M: ................................ 0,30 lZF 5 M: ................................... 0,30 lZF 10 M: ................................. 0,35 lZF 12 M: ................................. 0,55 lZF 15 M: ................................. 0,55 lZF 15 MA: ............................... 0,50 lZF 15 MIV: .............................. 1,00 lZF 25 M: ................................. 0,75 lZF 25 MA: ............................... 0,75 lZF 30 M: ....... min. 0,90 - max. 1,10 l• Vrijedi za nagib donje osovine na kut

od 20 stupnjeva (15° per ZF MIV).

Koristiti iskljuèivo ulje za automatskemjenjaèe kao u specifikacijamanavedenim u �Spisku ulja koji sepreporuèavaju� na str. 82.

6.1.5 PROBNI RAD1) Nakon zamjene ulja obaviti probni

rad.2) Upravljačku polugu postaviti u

položaju praznog hoda (N). Pokre-nuti motor i pustiti da kratko vrijemeradi na minimumu; izmjenjivač to-pline i hidraulički krug napunit će seuljem iz prijenosa.

3) Zaustaviti motor i ponovo provjeritirazinu ulja. Po potrebi nadoliti. Višakulja mora se ukloniti. Razina uljamora se nalaziti između oznakaMIN i MAX mjerne šipke. Razinu

Kvar1. Visoka temperatura ulja

2. Prisutstvo ulja na kućištu

3. Teško uključivanje

4. Sporo uključivanje

5. Plovilo se ne pokreće

Moguæi uzrok- Previsoka razina ulja

- Niska razina ulja

- Zaèepljen izmjenjivaè topline

- Nedostatak vode u krugu

- Otpu�teni vijci

- Otpu�teni spojevi

- Otpu�tena mjerna �ipka ulja

- Previsoka razina ulja tijekom rada

- Blokirani razdjelnik

- Daljinski upravljaè

- Blokirani razdjelnik

- Daljinski upravljaè

- Blokirani razdjelnik

- Pogre�an polo�aj upravljaèke poluge

- Gubitak propelera

- Lom osovine propelera

- Kvar na prijenosu

- Kvar na motoru

Rje�enje- Otkloniti vi�ak

- Nadoliti

- Zamijeniti izmjenjivaè i provjeriti krug vode

- Provjeriti krug i popraviti mjesto gubitka

- Stegnuti preporuèenom silom

- Stegnuti ili zamijeniti

- Stegnuti ili zamijeniti

- Otkloniti do oznake maksimuma

- Obratiti se ovla�tenom servisu

- Pode�avanje

- Obratiti se ovla�tenom servisu

- Pode�avanje

- Obratiti se ovla�tenom servisu

- Pode�avanje

- Ponovno montirati

- Obratiti se ovla�tenom servisu

- Obratiti se ovla�tenom servisu

- Obratiti se ovla�tenom servisu

ulja potrebno je ponovno provjeritinakon kratkog razdoblja rada.

6.1.6 KONZERVIRANJEUkoliko je potrebno prijenos uskladištitiza dulje razdoblje, primjerice tijekomzime, potrebno ga je u potpunostinapuniti ATF uljem (iz otvora mjernešipke); to je potrebno zbog zaštitesklopa od korozije.

PAŽNJAPrilikom ponovnog stavljanja u radprijenosa zamijeniti ulje.

Page 79: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

79

Radni Priručnik ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

8.1 Tehnički podaci

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 5 M 2.045 1.864 0.0066 0.0088 18 25 20 27 20 27 5000 8.5 19 SAE 6, B/W

2.722 2.150 0.0047 0.0063 13 18 14 19 17 23 5000 Max input power 20 kW

Technical Data for Pleasure Craft DutyBased on engine power B to DIN 6270; shock factorK = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MA 1.875 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13.5 30 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 39 53 47 63 50 67 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 2.136 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 M 1.556 1.955 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

1.875 1.955 Max input power 55 kW.Ratio 1.556 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.Ratio 1.875 «B» Pos.max torque 120 Nm.

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 12 M 2.136 1.955 0.0131 0.0176 37 49 39 53 47 63 5000 13 29 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.632 1.955 0.0111 0.0149 31 42 33 45 40 54 5000 Max input power 55 kW

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 95 Nm (70 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

2800 rpm 3000 rpm 3600 rpmZF 10 M 1.482 1.864 0.0109 0.0146 30 41 33 44 38 51 5000 10.3 23 SAE 4, 5, 6, B/W

1.792 1.864 Max input power 38 kW.2.045 1.864 0.0095 0.0128 27 36 29 38 34 46 5000 Ratio 1.482 «B» Pos.2.722 2.150 0.0068 0.0091 19 26 20 27 25 33 5000 max torque 95 Nm. Ratio

1.792 «B» Pos. maxtorque 95 Nm.

Page 80: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

Radni Priručnik ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

80

«A» POS = continuous running position (normally AHEAD).«B» POS = reverse position.B/W = Borg Warner adaptor.Note = For all «M» (Mechanical) transmissions reduce power capacity by the following shock factors: 1 cylinder engine ÷ 1.25, 2 cylinder engine ÷ 1.20, 3 cylinder engine ÷ 1.15.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders

* Max. 120 Nm (88.5 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».** Max 45 kW for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B».

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 15 MIV 2.134 2.224 0.0152 0.0204 46 61 55 73 55 74 5000 21 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.718 2.224 0.0111 0.0149 33 45 40 54 42 57 5000 Max input power 55 kW.8 degrees 2.995 2.224 Ratio 2.134 «B» Pos.

max torque 120 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder - K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders - K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 230 Nm (170 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 M 1.880 2.095 0.0262 0.0351 79 105 80 107 80 107 5000 18.5 41 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.273 2.095 0.0216 0.0289 65 87 78 104 80 107 5000 Max input power 80 kW.2.737 2.722 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Ratio 1.880 «B» Pos.

max torque 230 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 185 Nm (137 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 30 M 2.148 2.636 0.0241 0.0323 72 97 87 116 92 123 5000 23 51 4 & 5 Yanmar JH

2.696 2.636 Max input power 95 kW.Ratio 2.148 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.Ratio 2.696 «B» Pos.max torque 185 Nm.

K = 1.25 to be applied, if engine has 1 cylinder / K = 1.20 for 2 cylinders / K = 1.15 for 3 cylinders** Max. 169 Nm (125 ft lb) admissible for main travelling direction with gear lever set to «B»

MODEL RATIO POWER / RPM INPUT POWER CAPACITY MAX WEIGHT BELL HSGS.

«A» Pos «B»Pos kW hp kW hp kW hp kW hp RPM kg lb AND NOTES

3000 rpm 3600 rpm 3800 rpmZF 25 MA 2.227 2.737 0.0215 0.0288 64 86 77 104 80 107 5000 21.1 47 SAE 4, 5, B/W, Yanmar JH

2.737 2.737 0.0177 0.0237 53 71 64 85 67 90 5000 Max input power 80 kW.8 degrees Ratio 2.227 «B» Pos.

max torque 169 Nm.

Page 81: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

81

Radni Priručnik ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

9.1 Jamstvo

9.1.1 UVJETI JAMSTVAProizvođač ZF HURTH MARINE dajejamstvo za brodske prijenose serijeZFM za bilo kakvu nedostatak mate-rijala i/ili radne snage, za korištenje unormalnim uvjetima i u slučajevima kadje izv ršeno propisano redovnoodržavanje. Ovo jamstvo vrijedi samokada je montaža ispravno izvedena ikada se prijenos koristi na ispravannačin.Obveza tvrtke ZF HURTH MARINE poovom jamstvu ograničena je nazamjenu ili popravak (prema vlastitojodluci) dijela ili dijelova koje je ZFHURTH MARINE, nakon pregledaistih, priznala kao neispravne, poduvjetom da su dio ili dijelovi vraćeni unajbl iži ov lašteni serv is i da sutransportni troškovi plaćeni unaprijed,i to unutar razdoblja: dvadesetčetiri (24)mjeseca od datuma montaže i l itridesetšest (36) mjeseci od datumadopreme proizvođaču motora; vrijediuvjet koji ističe ranije. Obveze ZFHURTH MARINE po ovom jamstvu,kako je prije navedeno, također ovise io poštivanju Postupaka jamstva (kojisu sastavni dio ovoga jamstva)prodavača ili proizvođača motora, kojisu proizvod stavili na tržište.Svi zahtjevi za ostvarenje pravajamstva moraju se podnijeti prodavačuili proizvođaču motora koji se ZFprijenos stavili na tržište.Ovo jamstvo ne vrijedi ukoliko su jedanil i v iše elemenata poprav ljeni i liprepravljeni bez prijašnje pismenesuglasnosti ovlaštenog dobavljača ZFHURTH MARINE. Ovo jamstvo nevrijedi ukoliko se proizvod ili njegovekomponente ili dijelovi neispravno ilinemarno koriste, prepravljaju ili supodložni nezgodama i l i pak radpojedinih dijelovi nije u skladu s pisanimuputama ZF HURTH MARINE ili jenjihov režim rada bio teži ili u svakomslučaju preko opisanog režima rada zapojedini proizvod ili su dijelovi montiranii pušteni u rad na neispravan način.

Ovo jamstvo zamjenjuje sva ostalaeksplicitna ili implicitna jamstva kojauključuju jamstva prodaje i ispravnogakorištenja te eventualne ostale obvezekoje ukl jučuju štete prouzročenekorištenjem proizvoda. Tvrtka ZFHURTH MARINE nije odgovorna nitiovlašćuje ostale osobe da prihvatedruge odgovornosti vezane za prodajubrodskog prijenosa ZFM. Tvrtka ZFHURTH MARINE u svakom slučajunije odgovorna za štete veće od tržišnevrijednosti brodskog prijenosa ZFM.

Page 82: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

82

ADDINOL MINERALÖL GMBH, KRUMPA/D ADDINOL ATF D IIDADDINOL MINERALÖL GMBH, KRUMPA/D ADDINOL ATF D IIIAGIP PETROLI SPA, ROM/I AGIP ATF II DAGIP PETROLI SPA, ROM/I AGIP ATF D 309AGIP PETROLI SPA, ROM/I AGIP ATF PLUSAGIP PETROLI SPA, ROM/I AGIP DEXRON IIIAGIP SCHMIERTECHNIK, WÜRZBURG/D AUTOL GETRIEBEÖL ATF-DAGIP SCHMIERTECHNIK, WÜRZBURG/D AUTOL GETRIEBEÖL ATF III DARAL LUBRICANTS GMBH, BOCHUM/D ARAL GETRIEBEÖL ATF 22ARAL LUBRICANTS GMBH, BOCHUM/D ARAL GETR.ÖL ATF 55 F-30589AVIA MINERALÖL-AG, MÜNCHEN/D AVIA FLUID ATF 86BLASER SWISSLUBE, HASLE-RÜEGSAU/CH BLASOL 229BP OIL DEUTSCHLAND, HAMBURG/D FRONTOL UNIVERSAL-ATF 100BP OIL INTERNATIONAL, LONDON/GB AUTRAN DX IIBP OIL INTERNATIONAL, LONDON/GB AUTRAN MBXBP OIL INTERNATIONAL, LONDON/GB AUTRAN DX III (F-30370)BP OIL INTERNATIONAL, LONDON/GB AUTRAN DX III (F-30381)BUCHER+CIE AG, LANGENTHAL/CH MOTOREX ATF SUPER D-22656BUCHER+CIE AG, LANGENTHAL/CH MOTOREX ATF DEXRON III MCCALPAM GMBH, ASCHAFFENBURG/D PAMATIC FLUID 289CALPAM GMBH, ASCHAFFENBURG/D CALPAMATIC FLUID III FCALTEX PETROLEUM CORP., LONDON/GB CALTEX ATF-HDACALTEX PETROLEUM CORP., LONDON/GB CALTEX ATF-HDMCALTEX PETROLEUM CORP., LONDON/GB CALTEX TEXAMATIC 1278CALTEX PETROLEUM CORP., LONDON/GB CALTEX TEXAMATIC 7045CALTEX PETROLEUM CORP., LONDON/GB CALTEX TEXAMATIC 1205ACASTROL LTD, SWINDON/GB CASTROL TQ-D (22765)CASTROL LTD, SWINDON/GB CASTROL TQ DEXRON III F-30520CASTROL LTD, SWINDON/GB CASTROL TRANSMAX S (F-30319)CASTROL LTD, SWINDON/GB CASTROL TRANSMAX T (F-30359)CASTROL LTD, SWINDON/GB CASTROL TQ-D (21289)CASTROL LTD, SWINDON/GB CASTROL ATF 21293CEPSA, MADRID/E CEPSA ATF-70CHEVRON PRODUCTS CO., RICHMOND/USA CHEVRON ATF F-30108CITGO PETROLEUM CORP., TULSA/USA CITGO ATF DEXRON III F-30167C.J.DIEDERICHS SÖHNE, WUPPERTAL/D CIDISOL-HYDR.-FLUID DEXRON IIDDE OLIEBRON B.V., ZWIJNDRECHT/NL ATF DMMDE OLIEBRON B.V., ZWIJNDRECHT/NL ATF 289DEA MINERALÖL AG, HAMBURG/D DEAMATICDEA MINERALÖL AG, HAMBURG/D DEAFLUID 4011DEA MINERALÖL AG, HAMBURG/D DEAFLUID 3003DEUTSCHE SHELL AG, HAMBURG/D MAC ATF D-21666DUCKHAMS OIL, BROMLEY/GB UNIMATICELF LUBRIFIANTS, PARIS/F TRANSANTAR DF2ELF LUBRIFIANTS, PARIS/F ANTAR 22329ELF LUBRIFIANTS, PARIS/F ELFMATIC G2 22329ELF LUBRIFIANTS, PARIS/F HUILE RENAULT DIESEL STARMATICELF LUBRIFIANTS, PARIS/F ELFMATIC G3ELF LUBRIFIANTS, PARIS/F TRANSANTAR DF3ELLER-MONTAN-COMP., DUISBURG/D ELLMO-AUTOMATIK-FLUID 22233ENGEN PETROLEUM, CAPE TOWN/ZA ENGEN ATF 22DERTOIL SA, MADRID/E TRANSMISIONES AUTOMATICAS D2ESSO AG, HAMBURG/D ESSO ATF D (21611)ESSO AG, HAMBURG/D ESSO ATF F-30320ESSO AG, HAMBURG/D ESSO ATF D (21065)FIAT LUBRIFICANTI, VILLASTELLONE/I TUTELA GI/AFINA EUROPE SA, BRÜSSEL/B FINAMATIC II-DFUCHS LUBRICANTS (UK), DERBY/GB SILKTRAN MP-ATFFUCHS LUBRICANTS (UK), DERBY/GB SILKTRAN PSV ATFFUCHS MINERALÖLWERKE, MANNHEIM/D TITAN ATF 4000GINOUVES GEORGES SA, LA FARLEDE/F YORK LT 785GULF OIL (GB) LTD, CHELTENHAM/GB UNIFLUIDGULF OIL (GB) LTD, CHELTENHAM/GB ATF 2HANDELSMIJ NOVIOL B.V., NIJMEGEN/NL KENDALL ATF DEXRON IIDHOMBERG GMBH+CO KG, WUPPERTAL/D HOMBERG-GETRIEBE-FLUID DIGOL FRANCE, PARIS/F IGOL ATF 420INA RAFINERIJA ZAGREB/CROATIA INA-ATF SUPERITALIANA PETROLI, GENOVA/I TRANSMISSION FLUID DXJAPAN ENERGY CORP., TOKYO/JAPAN JOMO ATF KKÄPPLER K., STUTTGART/D SELECTOL FLUID GETR.ÖL IID 23KLÖCKNER ENERGIEHANDEL GMBH, KÖLN/D DEUTZ OEL ATF-DKROON OIL BV, ALMELO/NL ATF DEXRON IIDKROON OIL BV, ALMELO/NL ALMIROL ATFKUWAIT PETROLEUM, HOOGVLIET/NL Q8 AUTO 15KUWAIT PETROLEUM, HOOGVLIET/NL Q8 AUTO 14 (IID-21677)KUWAIT PETROLEUM, HOOGVLIET/NL Q8 AUTO 14 (IID)

KUWAIT PETROLEUM, HOOGVLIET/NL Q8 AUTO 14 (IID-21883)LEPRINCE+SIVEKE GMBH, HERFORD/D LEPRINXOL FLUID CNLIQUI MOLY / MEGUIN, ULM/D ATF IIELIQUI MOLY / MEGUIN, ULM/D MEGOL ATF IIDLUBRICATION ENGIN., FORT WORTH/USA AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDMAURAN SA, ODARS/F INTER OIL INTER MATIC ATF D2MIN.ÖL-RAFFIN. DOLLBERGEN, UETZE/D PENNASOL FLUID-GETR.ÖL TYP PCNMOBIL OIL, WEDEL/D MOBIL ATF 220 D20104 / D21685MOBIL OIL, WEDEL/D MOBIL ATF F-30107MOBIL OIL, WEDEL/D MOBIL ATF 220 D21412 / D22187MOBIL SEKIYU KABUS.KAISHA, TOKYO/J MOBIL ATF 220Y (D-21412)MOL HUNGARIAN OIL, KOMARON/H CARRIER ATFMORRIS LUBRICANTS, SHREWSBURY/GB LIQUIMATIC DIINAFTEC, ALGIER/DZ TASSILIANANHAI SUPERIOR LUB-OIL, CHINA NANHAI ATF (D2)NIS-RAFINERIJA NAFTE BEOGRAD/YU GALAX MATIC DACOEST G. MIN.ÖLWERK, FREUDENSTADT/D ATF T 4011OMEX PETROLEUM PTY, BELLEVUE/AUS OMEX ATF DEXRON IIOMV AG, SCHWECHAT/A OMV ATF D II (D22427)OMV AG, SCHWECHAT/A OMV ATF III (F-30580)OPTIMOL ÖLWERKE, HAMBURG/D OPTIMOL ATF T 4011OSWALD KLUTH, BARGFELD-STEGEN/D UNIVERSAL ATF-DPAKELO MOTOR OIL, SAN BONIFACIO/I MULTIPURPOSE TRANSM. FLUID IIDPANOLIN AG, MADETSWIL/CH PANOLIN ATF MULTI 21996PANOLIN AG, MADETSWIL/CH PANOLIN ATF DEXRON IIIPARS OIL CO., TEHRAN/IR PARS ENTEGHAL-E AUTOMATIC OILPAZ LUBRICANTS&CHEMICALS, HAIFA/IL PAZBO EZFPENNZOIL PRODUCT COMP., HOUSTON/USA PENNZOIL ATF F-30110PETRO-CANADA, MISSISSAUGA/CDN DEXRON III/MERC.ATF (F-30395)PETROL OFISI A.S., BAKANLIKLAR/TR PETROL OFISI ATF IIPETROLEX, KWIDZYN/PL VECO MATIC IIDPRINZ-SCHULTE, FRECHEN/D AERO-LINE ATF-2PRINZ-SCHULTE, FRECHEN/D AERO-LINE ATF-DREPSOL DISTRIBUCION SA, MADRID/E REPSOL MATIC ATFS.A.E.L, ALCOBENDAS/E GULF ATF DII D-22233SASOL OIL, RANDBURG/ZA SASOL ATF DXIISCHMIERSTOFFRAFFINERIE SALZBERGEN/D WINTERSHALL ATF DSHELL ASEOL AG, BERN/CH ASEOL ATF DB UNIVERSALSHELL INTERNATIONAL, LONDON/GB SHELL DONAX TA (D-21666)SHELL INTERNATIONAL, LONDON/GB SHELL DONAX TG (F-30358)SLOVNAFT JS CO, BRATISLAVA/SLO MADIT AUTOMATICSONOL ISRAEL LTD, HAIFA/IL DEXRON 2 DSOPROGRASA SA, MADRID/E SOPRAL 164STATOIL STAVANGER/N TRANSWAY DX III (F-30373)STATOIL STAVANGER/N TRANSWAY DX IISTL TECNOL, ESCALQUENS/F TECNOL TECMATIC D2SUN OIL COMPANY, AARTSELAAR/B SUNAMATIC 149SUN OIL COMPANY, AARTSELAAR/B SUNAMATIC 153SUOMEN PETROOLI OY, HAMINA/SF TEBOIL FLUID E (F-30301)SUOMEN PETROOLI OY, HAMINA/SF TEBOIL FLUID DSVENSKA STATOIL AB, NYNÄSHAMN/S TRANSWAY DX III (F-30373)TAMOIL LUBES, GENEVA/CH TAMOIL ATF II DTEXACO LUBRICANTS COMP., BEACON/USA ATF MERCON / DEXRON IIITEXACO SERVICES LTD, BRÜSSEL/B TEXAMATIC 7045TEXACO SERVICES LTD, BRÜSSEL/B TEXAMATIC 4261TEXACO SERVICES LTD, BRÜSSEL/B TEXAMATIC 7080TEXACO SERVICES LTD, BRÜSSEL/B TEXTRAN PSMTEXACO SERVICES LTD, BRÜSSEL/B TEXAMATIC 4011TEXACO SERVICES LTD, BRÜSSEL/B TEXAMATIC 4291TEXACO SERVICES LTD, BRÜSSEL/B TEXAMATIC 9226TOTAL RAFFINAGE DISTR., PARIS/F TOTAL FLUIDE ATXTOTAL RAFFINAGE DISTR., PARIS/F TOTAL FLUIDE IIDTOTAL RAFFINAGE DISTR., PARIS/F TOTAL FLUIDE AT 42TOTAL SOUTH AFRICA, JOHANNESBURG/ZA TOTAL FLUIDE ATDTURBOTANK BÖSCHE+BÖDEKER, BREMEN/D TURBO UNIV. ATF MERCON 4011UFANEFTECHIM REFINERY, UFA/RUS UFALUB ATFUNIL DEUTSCHLAND GMBH, BREMEN/D UNIL MATIC CN T 4011VALVOLINE INC., LEXINGTON/USA VALVOLINE MULTI-PURPOSE ATFVALVOLINE INTERNAT., DORDRECHT/NL VALVOLINE ATF TYPE DVEBA OEL AG, GELSENKIRCHEN/D MOVARA ATF-GETRIEBEÖL DIIDVEEDOL INTERNATIONAL, SWINDON/GB VEEDOL ATF-M (22764)VEEDOL INTERNATIONAL, SWINDON/GB VEEDOL ATF DEXRON III F-30521VEEDOL INTERNATIONAL, SWINDON/GB VEEDOL UNITRANS S PLUSYACCO SA, ST PIERRE-LES-ELBEUF/F YACCO ATF DZELLER+GMELIN GMBH&CO, EISLINGEN/D DIVINOL FLUID 666

10.1 List of recommended fluids

Page 83: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

83

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

11.1 Dealer ListAUSTRALIAZF AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.14 Lidco St. Arndell ParkNSW 2148Tel. +61 (0)2 9679 5555Fax +61 (0)2 9679 5500E-mail: [email protected]

BRAZILZF DO BRASIL LtdaAvenida Conde Zeppelin, 1935CEP 18103-905 Sorocaba-SPBRASILTel. +55 (0)15 4009 2389Fax +55 (0)15 4009 2233E-mail:[email protected]

BELGIUMSee Netherlands

CHINAZF PD SHANGHAIRepresentative OfficeRoom 2504, Jiangnan Building,No. 600 Luban RoadShanghai 200023P.R. CHINATel. +86 (0) 21 6301 4338Fax +86 (0) 21 6301 6449E-mail: [email protected]

CROAZIAITEC d.o.o.Tommy MalperaUl. R. Boškovica 35 (Dubovac)47 000 KarlovacMat. Br. 1734083Tel. +385 (047) 631755Tel. +385 (047) 631756Hendy: +385 (047) 3337440Hendy: +385 (091) 3337442E-mail: [email protected]

CYPRUSCHAR. PILAKOUTAS Ltd.P.O. Box 1168, 7 Larnaca Road1503 NicosiaTel. +357 22 349 572Fax +357 22 349 952E-mail: [email protected]

DENMARKZF DANMARK ApSTaastrupgaardsvej 8-10DK-2630 TaastrupTel. +45 (0)43 436243Fax +45 (0)43 432643E-mail: [email protected]

FINLANDATOY OYRuukintie 7-9FIN-02330 EspooTel. +358 (0) 9 682 71Fax +358 (0) 9 6827 305E-mail: [email protected]

FRANCEZF FRANCE S.a.r.l.Z.I. - 3-11 Rue Henri PoincaréF-92 167 Antony CédexTel. +33 (0)1 4096 4265Fax +33 (0)1 4096 4285E-mail: [email protected]

GERMANYZF MARINE GmbH ZF Hurth Marine Rep.Zamdorferstrasse 90D-81677 MünchenTel. +49 (0)89 930094 63/64Fax +49 (0)89 930094 21E-mail: [email protected]

GREECEEURODIESEL K. & E. MALERDOS CO.9 Papazoglou Str.GR-18540 PiraeusTel. +30 (0)210 417 9693Fax +30 (0)210 417 5441E-mail: [email protected]

TEKMAR Ltd15 Ethn. Makariou Str.GR-185 47 Neofaliro Piraeus Tel. +30 (0)210 4820814Fax +30 (0)210 4811803E-mail: [email protected]

ISRAELNIMDA CO. Ltd.Lev Pesach StreetNorth Industrial Zone, Lod 71293P.O. Box 768, Lod 71293Tel. +972 (0)8 9781 111Fax +972 (0)8 9781 137E-mail: [email protected]

ITALYZF HURTH MARINE S.p.A.Via S. Andrea, 16I-38062 Arco (TN)Tel. +39 0464 580555Fax +39 0464 580544E-mail: [email protected]

ZF ITALIA S.r.l.Via Donizetti, 11I-20090 Assago (MI)Tel. +39 02 4888 31Fax +39 02 4884 3807E-mail: [email protected]

JAPANZF Marine Japan Co. Ltd.Fujikoshi Building. 1 - 10 - 11Iriya Taito-kuTokyo 110-0013Tel. +81 (0)3 5808 4521Fax +81 (0)3 5808 4531E-mail: [email protected]

KOREA (SOUTH)ZF KOREA CO. Ltd.422-2 Chongchon-dongBupyong-GuIncheon, 403-032Rep. of KOREATel. +82 (0)32 5051 508Fax +82 (0)32 5051 514E-mail: [email protected]

LUXEMBURGSee Netherlands

MALTAOCEANS9, Main StreetZurrieq ZRQ 03Tel. +356 (0)21 640 703Fax +356 (0)21 641 223E-mail: [email protected]

NETHERLANDSADS van STIGTAvelingen - West 30NL - 4202 MS GorinchemTel. +31 (0)183 650 000Fax +31 (0)183 650 001E-mail: [email protected]

NORWAYKGK NORGE ASCaspar Storms Vei 19N-0664 OsloTel. +47 (0)22 720 575Fax +47 (0)22 720 902E-mail: [email protected]

POLANDVOLVO PENTA POLSKA Sp. z.o.o.Prostokatna 5A Str.81-601 GydniaTel. +48 (0)58 627 3380Fax +48 (0)58 627 3390E-mail: [email protected]

RUSSIAZF MARINE RUSSIASuite 404, Obvodny Kanal Emb.,118190005 Saint PetersburgTel. +7 812 441 37 94Fax +7 812 441 37 94E-mail:[email protected]

SINGAPOREZF SOUTH EAST ASIA Pte.Ltd11 Tuas Drive 1638678 SingaporeTel. +65 6424 8731Fax +65 6424 8788E-mail: [email protected]

SOUTH AFRICAZF of SOUTH AFRICA Pty. Ltd.Meadowdale Ext. 3170 Herman Road1401 Germiston JohannesburgTel. +27 (0)11 457 0000Fax +27 (0)11 453 7506E-mail: [email protected]

SPAINZF ESPAÑA, S.A.Avenida Fuentemar, 11E-28820 Coslada, MadridTel. +34 (0)91 485 2698Fax +34 (0)91 485 0036E-mail: [email protected]

SWEDENKG KNUTSSON AB TransmissionsdivisionenHammarbacken 8SE-191 81 SollentunaTel. +46 (0)8 923 000Fax +46 (0)8 929 599E-mail:[email protected]

TURKEYNIVEKO Makina Ticaret LimitedTakkeci Sokak No. 3TR-34345 Arnavutköy - IstanbulTel. +90 (0)212 287 2780Fax +90 (0)212 287 6571E-mail: [email protected]

UNITED KINGDOMZF GREAT BRITAIN Ltd.Abbeyfield Road, LentonNottingham NG7 2SXTel. +44 (0)115 986 9211Fax +44 (0)870 460 1479E-mail: [email protected]

UNITED ARAB EMIRATESZF MARINE MIDDLE EAST LLCOffice No. 502 & 503Golden Tower Buildingopposite to Marbella ClubBuheira Corniche,P.O. BOX 26093Sharjah - U.A.E.Tel. + 971 6 574 7074Fax. + 971 6 574 7174E-mail:[email protected]

U.S.A.ZF MARINE, LLC.(U.S.HEADQUARTERSPleasure Craft, Propulsion, Latin America, Caribbean,After Market)3131 Southwest 42nd StreetFort Lauderdale, FL 33312U.S.A.Tel. +1 954 581 4040Latin America +1 954 581 4063Fax +1 954 581 4078-77E-mail: [email protected]

ZFI MARINE, LLC West Coast(Commercial and Fast Craft)12125 Harbor Reach Drive, Ste.BMukilteo, WA 98275 U.S.A.Tel. +1 425 583 1900Fax +1 425 493 1579Toll Free 800 546 5455E-mail: [email protected]

Page 84: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

84

12.1 Installation Layout

ZF 5

M

Page 85: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

85

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

ZF 1

0 M

Page 86: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

86

ZF 1

2 M

Page 87: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

87

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

ZF 1

5 M

Page 88: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

88

ZF 1

5 M

A

Page 89: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

89

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

ZF 1

5 M

IV

Page 90: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

90

ZF 2

5 M

Page 91: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

91

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

ZF 2

5 M

A

Page 92: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

92

ZF 3

0 M

Page 93: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

93

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

$

$

Transmission modelRatio Serial No.

Engine make and type

Engine Ratinghp at rpm

Date of Commissioning

Shifting Lever Position o AFor Forward o B

Pleasure Craft oCommercial Craft o

Owner ......................................................

.................................................................

Address ...................................................

.................................................................

Country ....................................................

.................................................................

Signature .................................................

.................................................................

ZF M WARRANTY CARDStandard Warranty: ZF HURTH MARINE warrants its type ZFM Reversing Marine Transmission to be free from defects inmaterial and work-manship under normal use and maintenance, provided that this warranty shall apply if, and only if, the equipmenthas been properly installed and operated. The obligation of ZF HURTH MARINE under this warranty shall be limited to thereplacement or repair, at its choice, of any part or parts found to be defective by ZF HURTH MARINE upon its examination ofsame, provided that the part or parts are returned to the nearest official ZF HURTH MARINE distributor, freight prepaid, withinthe time:1. Transmission for pleasure craft…

Twenty-four (24) months from date of commissioning or thirty-six (36) months from date of delivery to engine manufacturer,whichever occurs first.

2. Transmission for commercial craft…Twelve (12) months from date of commission or twenty-four (24) months from date of delivery to engine manufacturer,whichever occurs first.

The obligations of ZF HURTH MARINE under this warranty as set forth herein shall also be subject to compliance by thedistributor or engine manufacturer who has purchased the product with the Warranty Procedures which is made a part of thiswarranty.All warranties shall run to distributors and engine manufacturers who have purchased the type ZFM Reversing Marine Transmission.This warranty shall not apply to any part or parts which have been repaired or altered, without the prior written consent of anofficial ZF HURTH MARINE dealer. This warranty shall not apply if the product or any of its components or parts have beensubject to misuse, abuse, negligence, alteration, or accident, or have not been operated in accordance with printed instructionsof ZF HURTH MARINE or has been operated under conditions more severe than, or otherwise exceeding, those set forth in thespecifications for said product, or has been improperly installed or reinstalled, or improperly maintained and operated.This warranty is expressly in lieu of all other warranties expresses or implied including the warranties of merchantability andfitness for use and of all other obligations including without limitation, consequential damages, and ZF HURTH MARINE neitherassumes nor authorizes any other person to assume for ZF HURTH MARINE, any other liability in connection with the sale of theZFM REVERSING MARINE TRANSMISSION. ZF HURTH MARINE shall in no event be liable for any breach of warranty in anamount exceeding the purchase price of the ZFM REVERSING MARINE TRANSMISSION.

To be returned duly signed to ZF HURTH MARINE ARCO (TN) - ItalyDa ritornare alla ZF HURTH MARINE ARCO (TN) dopo averlo completato con i vostri dati e quelli relativi all'invertitore.

A renvoyer au ZF HURTH MARINE ARCO (TN) - Italy - apres l'avoir rempliAusgefüllt an ZF HURTH MARINE ARCO (TN) - Italy - zurück

Transmission modelRatio Serial No.

Engine make and type

Engine Ratinghp at rpm

Date of Commissioning

Shifting Lever Position o AFor Forward o B

Pleasure Craft oCommercial Craft o

Owner ......................................................

.................................................................

Address ...................................................

.................................................................

Country ....................................................

.................................................................

Signature .................................................

.................................................................

Page 94: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso
Page 95: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

95

ZF 4-1 M / ZF 30 M

PROGRAMMA DI MANUTENZIONE - MAINTENANCE PROGRAM - WARTUNGSPLANPROGRAMME D'ENTRETIEN - PROGRAMA DE MANTENIMIENTO - VEDLIKEHOLDSPLAN -

PROGRAMA DE MANUTENÇÃO - ONDERHOUDSPROGRAMMA - HUOLTO- OHJELMA - - PROGRAM ODRŽAVANJA

INTERVENTO - INTERVENTION - LEISTUNG - INTERVENTION- INTERVENCIONES - INNGREP - INTERVENÇÃO - INGREEP -TOIMENPITEET - - ZAHVATTDescrizione - Description - Beschreibung - Description - Descripción - Beskrivelse -Descrição - Beschrijving - Kuvaus - - Opis

..............................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................

INTERVENTO dopo prime 25 ore - INTERVENTION After the first 25hours - LEISTUNG erste 25 Stunden - INTERVENTION après pre-miere 25 heures - INTERVENCION después de las primeras 25 horas- INGREEP etter de første 25 timene - INTERVENÇÃO Depois dasprimeiras 25 horas - INGREEP na de eerste 25 uren - Toimenpiteet25 käyttötunnin jälkeen - -ZAHVAT nakon prvih 25 sati rada

Sostituzione olio - Fluid change - Ölwechsel - Vidange de l'huile - Sustituciónaceite - Oljeskift - Troca de fluido - Olie vervangen - Öljynvaihto -

- Zamjena ulja - ................................................................qSostituzione filtro olio - Filter fluid change - Filterwechsel - Vidange de filtrehuile - Sustitución filtro aceite - Skifte oljefilter - Substituição de filtro -Oliefilter vervangen - Suodattimen vaihto -

- Filter ulja - ...........................................................q

INTERVENTO - INTERVENTION - LEISTUNG - INTERVENTION- INTERVENCIONES - INNGREP - INTERVENÇÃO - INGREEP -TOIMENPITEET - - ZAHVATT

Descrizione - Description - Beschreibung - Description - Descripción - Beskrivelse -

Descrição - Beschrijving - Kuvaus - - Opis

..............................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................

Timbro officina Data / Workshop stamp - Date /Werkstattstempel - Datum / Tampon de l'Atelier - Date /

Sello taller - Fecha / Verkstedstempel - dato /Carimbo da oficina - Data / Stempel werkplaats Datum /Korjaamon leima- Pvm / -

Pečat servisera Datum

Timbro officina Data / Workshop stamp - Date /Werkstattstempel - Datum / Tampon de l'Atelier - Date /

Sello taller - Fecha / Verkstedstempel - dato /Carimbo da oficina - Data / Stempel werkplaats Datum /Korjaamon leima- Pvm / -

Pečat servisera Datum

Timbro officina Data / Workshop stamp - Date /Werkstattstempel - Datum / Tampon de l'Atelier - Date /

Sello taller - Fecha / Verkstedstempel - dato /Carimbo da oficina - Data / Stempel werkplaats Datum /Korjaamon leima- Pvm / -

Pečat servisera Datum

Page 96: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

NOTE

Page 97: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

NOTE

Page 98: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

NOTE

Page 99: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso

NOTE

Page 100: ZF 4-1 M ZF 5 M ZF 10 M ZF 12 M ZF 15 M ZF 15 MA ZF 15 MIV ... · zf 4-1 m zf 5 m zf 10 m zf 12 m zf 15 m zf 15 ma zf 15 miv zf 25 m zf 25 ma zf 30 m 310.01.0006f manuale d’uso